Home

Quadro4Li Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

1. Add IP Policy Route Priority requires a numeric value from 1 to 252 to define the priority of the routing rule The lower the number the sooner the routing rule will take effect higher priority From requires the packet source IP address and subnet mask of the specified destination to match with the rule Via IP address requires the IP address of the subsequent router Fig Il 29 Add IP Policy Route page for IP packet forwarding The PPTP L2TP Routes allow IP packets forwarding through the 0 A A ee PPTP and L2TP tunnels of the Quadro If PPTP L2TP connections iS do not exist on Quadro VPN routes cannot be generated The PPTP L2TP Routes table displays all generated VPN routes ti Ot or ov sec Inver se Selection with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route E ae connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet cat mada ii aba where the incoming packets should be routed Via Tunnel for the VPN tunnel incoming packets should be routed through and Tunnel State for the actual state of the route tunnel up or down enahiod up fiz 2200 6 LIT gt quan gt Baek The Add button opens the Add VPN Route page where a new Fig Il 30 VPN Routing table VPN route can be generated Man System Users Telephony ernet Uplink Network The Add VPN Route page offers the following components Add VPN Route Route Via contains t
2. Fig Il 152 Advanced Settings for SLA page Please Note System allows you to forward incoming calls to the Quadro PSTN lines thus giving callers a possibility to make calls through remote Quadro s PSTN lines To do so select PSTN from the Call Type drop down list and type pstn capital and lower case letters allowed in the Forward to text field Caller will connect to the available PSTN line get the dial tone and be free to dial the PSTN number Key System Advanced Configuration The Key System Emulation Advanced Configuration page is used to enable disable the blind transfer service from SLA lines to extensions or their voice mailboxes The page consists of the following settings e The Enable blind transfer to VM checkbox indicates whether a call received to an SLA can be blind transferred to extensions voice mailboxes Selecting the checkbox will enable the blind transfer functionality and will require a prefix digits only that should precede the calls to voice mailboxes To call a voice mailbox the user should dial the specified prefix followed by the extension number Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep ygi J A quadro Key System Emulation Advanced Configuration Enable blind transfer to WM Prefix 77 The Enable blind transfer to extension checkbox indicates M Enable blind transfer to extension whether a call received to an SLA can be blind transferred to extensions Selectin
3. Add functional button is used to add a new traphost to the table and opens Add SNMP Traphost page where the new traphost might be defined Page consists of the following components Traphost text field requires an IP address or the host name of the traphost Administrating application s host address should be inserted here Community text field requires community description public private etc for the administrating application to accept the notifications about the certain events on the Quadro Field may contain some kind of password which should be the same both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management A group of radio buttons is used to select the SNMP protocol version used for events notifications delivered by the Quadro to the administrating application Diagnostics Administrator s Menus Mim Stic Users beleplony ferred Ui Heteak SNMP Trap Settings SHE i ci eet Fig 11 51 SNMP Trap Settings page Man Stem Usas Telephony Aer me plk Hawork Add SNMP Traphost 1471650 55 Fig 1I 52 Add SNMP Traphost page The Diagnostics page gives a possibility of running Network and WAN protocol diagnostics to verify Quadro s connectivity and to download all system logs for possible problems recovery The Start detecting WAN Protocol button is used to initiate WAN diagnostics that will detect the WAN IP configurations static or through DHCP and PPP servers For static WA
4. Please check your pending events Copyright C 2003 2010 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 12 Quadro System Security Diagnostics page The output of Security Audit may look as follows Start security audit Checking Firewall done IP Lines done Call Routing done Extensions done Users done Settings do not correspond to selected security level You can view the complete report by clicking the Show the latest security report link below The Show the latest security report link allows to display the last security audit report This page also contains the following useful links to adjust the system security e User Rights Management e IP Line Settings e Firewall NAT Please note Refer to the Quadro admin guide regarding the security related configuration options on the Quadro Status The system status window displays non editable tables providing extensive system status information about Quadro General Information Network Status Lines Status Memory Status Hardware Status SIP Registration Status IP Lines Registration Status and License Status The links on this page lead to device Transfer Statistics user mailboxes and supplementary services configuration pages The System Status page has several tables providing system information Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 12 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus General Information Ccpygi
5. Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 111 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Callback automatic call to the voice mail author This can be used as notification that the recipient has received the voice mail but has not yet played it e Call To text field requires the destination s phone number depending on the selected call type For Callback call type no destination s phone number is required e The next two fields are used for retransmission of phone notifications The number of times text field indicates the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the notification is specified to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field For Callback call type the first notification is sent to the voice mail author after the first expiration of the interval defined in the Repeat every text field For calls with call type different from Callback the first notification will be sent immediately Restore default Notification Message restores the default notification message If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled Upload new Notification Message will show the attached notification file selected by the current extension Please note that a different notification message can be uploaded in case this service serves as a notification to the extens
6. The VolP Carrier Wizard is used to define access codes for available VolP Carrier accounts which will particularly allow you to reach users over IP PSTN providers or to call to the peers registered on the certain SIP servers by dialing simple digit combinations For each configured VolP carrier the wizard creates a specific IP PSTN routing rule in the Call Routing table This entry is available to PBX users only which means only PBX users can make calls to the corresponding VolP carrier Additionally a virtual extension automatically generated in Extensions Management will be registered on the defined VoIP Carriers SIP server The settings of that extension will be used to make calls from Quadro s users towards the created VolP Carrier will be placed Mam Syetam Users Telephony miena Uplink Henwaik WolP Carrier Wizard Select VolP Carle M Wonage k Guidiun ge VolP Carrier Wizard Page 1 provides a following option of describing the VolP carrier When predefined carrier is selected in the VoIP Carrier drop down list the SIP Server and Port will be already predefined in the next page Manual selection allows you to manually set up the VoIP Carrier settings The Description field allows you to insert an optional Fig 11 142 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 1 description of the VoIP Carrier Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 83 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam Syetam Uesg Telaptiatty imane Ui
7. Please check your pending events Copyright C 2003 2010 Epygi Technologies Man System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Ltd All rights reserved Administrator s Menus Network Copysi quadro IP Clipboard IP Clipboard Fig 11 198 VLAN Settings Add Entry page biter net Uplink Network Register Your Device In Technical Support Center Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking Fig 11 199 Device Registration page The Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking pages offer extended features for the administrator to activate incoming outgoing call blocking services for certain callers The users cannot change this information For more information on the Call Blocking Settings pages see the Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking chapters of the Extensions Users Guide Manual Ill The Call Blocking pages accessed from the Caller ID Based Services table by clicking on the corresponding address gives the administrator the option to enable blocking services which could not be disabled by the users Along with the components seen by the user an additional Protect this entry checkbox is available in the Call Blocking Add Entry pages for administrator access only With this checkbox selected the user will be unable to deactivate the blocking services configured by the administrator Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Maii Wind fliail Sapplein tidbay Senaces Cal
8. mins2sec occupied by the universal extension recordings Link 8 sec Sou 43 min 32 sec 9 how 43 min 41 sec refers to the Upload Universal Extension Recordings ATA page where universal extension system messages Back may be uploaded Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Call Statistics shows the current number of calls i Fig 11 21 Memory Status page with recorded statistic entries Hardware Status y y Cepygi Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network VIO 04Li109 Refresh in 598 seconds Quadro Status Hardware Status General Information link 1 is up no synchronization 7 eich link 2 is up no synchronization Network Status ISDN 4 Trunks link 3 1s up no synchronization Lines Status link 4is up no synchronization Memory Status LAN Ethernet 10 100 Mbps Link is up 100 Mbps full duplex Hardware Status wan Ethernet 10 Mbps Linkis up 10 Mbps half duplex SIP Registration Status License Status The Hardware Status table displays a list of the hardware devices present and currently available on the Quadro board The hardware device version Copyright C 2003 2008 Epval ologies Ltd All rights reserved number and additional comments about its state are indicated here Fig 11 22 Hardware Status page SIP Registration Status The SIP Registration Status table includes the following information that may be sorted in ascending or descend
9. when the Quadro s GUI is accessed from a PC located in the Quadro s Bras et ng Copan LAN If you wish to connect the SIP phone s GUI through the WAN an appropriate Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Filtering Rules should be added on the Quadro The Advanced link in the Details column appears for the Snom and Aastra IP phones and takes you to the Programmable Keys Configuration page where programmable keys for the corresponding IP phone can be configured The Reboot link in the Details column appears for supported IP phones and is used to remotely initiate a reboot of an IP phone attached to the Fig 11 119 IP Line Edit page line Supported SIP Phones The following is the list of SIP phones that can be configured to work with Quadro IP PBXs using the Plug and Play option e snom190 e Aastra 6751i also supports FVC e snom200 e Aastra 67531 also supports FVO e snom 220 e Aastra 6755i also supports FVC e snom 300 also supports FVC e Aastra 6757i also supports FVO e snom 320 also supports FVC e Aastra 6757iCT e snom 360 also supports FVC e Aastra 6730i also supports FVC Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 65 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide snom 370 also supports FVC snom 820 also supports FVC snom 870 also supports FVC snom MeetingPoint also supports FVC Aastra 480i also supports FVC Aastra 480iCT Aastra 9112i also supports FVC Aastra 91331 also supports FVC Aas
10. Choose Extensions Length Quadro s initial boot up or the default configuration settings restore an intermediate page is displayed The Change Extension Length page is used to define the extension settings applicable to all extensions on the Quadro This page disappears once being saved The Change Extension Length page consists of a radio button selection Fig 11 66 Extensions Management Add Entry page e Leave Current Length radio button selection is used to leave the current length of extensions on the Quadro Per default the extensions length on the Quadro is 2 In front of this selection the actual configured length of extensions is displayed e Change Length radio button selection is used to change the actual length of extensions on the Quadro This selection enables the following information to be defined The Extension Length drop down list requires you to choose the length of the extensions on the Quadro This number will apply to all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions The length of the extension can be 2 3 or 4 The Extension Prefix text field is used to define a prefix with which all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions should start The prefix cannot start with the digits 0 or 9 otherwise an error message appears Please Note By saving the settings on the Change Extension Length page all existing extensions will lose the custom voice
11. For example it will not be logged when e calls incoming from or addressed to the IP lines or remote extension e calls from an external user are routed to another external user through Quadro s routing rules In the first case RTP statistics will be logged if remote extension or IP line user is calling locally to the Quadro s extension or auto attendant The Configure Call Quality Event Notification link leads to the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page where call quality control notification specifics can be configured From the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page you may configure event notification policy when the call quality is lower than the allowed level This page consists of a Notify checkbox which enables the call quality monitoring mechanism for the corresponding event notifications and a Call Quality less than drop down list where the least satisfactory call quality should be selected When a call with the quality less than the level selected here is registered on the Quadro an event notification will appear When the Notify checkbox is disabled no Call Quality events will occur on the Quadro Main System Users Telepheey haces Uplink Metweak Configure Call Quality Event Notification Please Note The ways of notification for the Call Quality events Fig 11 107 Configure Call Quality Event Notification page should be configured from the Events page The Configure System Events link le
12. Hack WolP Carrler Wizard VoIP Carrier Settings variar Seite Pa VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 2 is used to define VolP Carrier hommes eco Settings The page contains following components PET 1 VoIP Carrier Common Settings SP Saver phone voprvongge ne The Account Name text field requires a username for ini 306 authentication on the defined SIP server Host Ae 192 168 74 125 The Password text field requires a password for t 1511 authentication on the defined SIP server Secondary SIP Server The Confirm Password text field requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error message Incorrect Password confirm will appear The SIP Server text field requires an IP address or the hostname of the SIP server destination party it is registered on i bee 1 j The SIP Server Port text field requires the port number of Fig 11 143 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 2 the SIP server destination party it is registered on 2 VoIP Carrier Advanced Settings The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is applicable only when a route is used for calls towards a configured VoIP Carrier from a peer located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected the RTP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers UserID requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should have been
13. Retrieve Timeout text field requires a timeout in minutes during which the parked call will stay active i e the parked user will remain on hold When the call park retrieve timeout expires the hold music stops playing to the parked user and a new call is being placed towards the extension initiating the call park If the extension initiating the call park does not answer the call the caller which has been recently parked will reach the extension s Voice Mailbox if enabled otherwise will be disconnected Paging Group Extension Settings Paging Group amp Access List The Paging Group service is used to page a group of extensions by forcing extensions to go off hook and opening one way communication The service is particularly used for announcements addressed to a group of extensions Service allows to page multiple extensions by dialing the Paging Group extension Please Note The Paging Group service requires called extensions to use one of the following SIP or analog phones which are able to automatically go off hook e SNOM 300 SIP phone e Aastra 91331 SIP phone e Aastra 57i SIP phone e SNOM 320 SIP phone e Aastra 9112i SIP phone e Aastra 480e analog phone e SNOM 360 SIP phone e Aastra 51i SIP phone e Grandstream BT100 e SNOM 370 SIP phone e Aastra 53i SIP phone e Grandstream BT200 e Aastra 480i SIP phone e Aastra 551 SIP phone e Grandstream GXP2000 The Paging Group list is used to define the extensions th
14. S cnc 17 IP Cines Regista ion AAPP PP 18 na E E E UE E ETET T E EE 18 ei S T EEEE EEEE EEE EEE EEE EES E 19 Connora uon Managemen isini E AA 21 Automower N are ro A A A O ee 22 Legible Contiguration Management rss INN uss NENNEN ENEN ANAE ges ou ENNAN NEENA ENEN ERNS 23 EE o me o e 23 A nn e reo O EEE EA 26 Lilo A A o E O E US E OE O RO RO O IIA 27 EEEE S A E AA A A A A ieee A A A N A A pst ore neni uubaseeaere eines 27 A E E o A T AAA oo uu Pe po E A A RN 28 oo Un ES E cee ere 29 Ss nn e o A O A 30 DEC g t tte en te ee AAA ARAN a r 31 oi Clit ole A PA 31 POU go o 33 plead Eo Us A a e o e o A senna ee uenuNesors 33 user ROMS Manage Mena RA 34 nn POSES En e 36 o isis 36 sE ASAS CS UNO Serra aa iasatas adas E 38 Pickup Group Extension SettidgS ooccoooccccccnccnnnncccann rr 42 CalrareEdeasion Se IA Site ee eee ee ee ee eee rere 43 Paging Group Extension o pr e E O AE PE aaa aaa anaana ai 44 ol o A o oo IU 5P PM E e C EEA 45 EXIenSi n 7010 ore hee ee ener nr heer nnn nen ee een eee eee ee ee ee ey eer re 48 ella o tt et ee ee E TI e 49 Upload Universal Extensi n RecordiNgS aaa NENA IIA AAA 49 Receptionist Manageme usnmessacaracamara rana nanada AAN ED AAA aan 50 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Eemo OCON sd dd errr er eter rere errr errr rr rt rere errr errr errr rere errr er ee er Teter 53 Ulla lolgra ol NOMes Dal dbdce satcetiantatetuteteeetcsndutudedadutetecetetnducududadeeeencetudaadaudauser
15. The Enable checkbox is used to enable the newly created routing rule By default this checkbox is selected so the newly created routing rule will be enabled But if you wish to create a routing rule for a later use disable it from this page The new routing rule will be added to the Call Routing Table but will be disabled and will not be considered when placing calls through the call routing unless it is enabled again The Pattern text field specifies calls to which the rule should be applied If a call either inbound or outbound has a destination number that matches the specified pattern it will be completed according to the current rule A routing pattern may contain wildcards The complete list of characters and wildcards allowed in this text field is given in the chapter Allowed Characters and Wildcards Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x TH Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Number of Discarded Symbols NDS requires the number of symbols that should be discarded from the beginning of the routing pattern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field Moin System Users Telephony internet Uptink Network otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear Call Routing Wizard Prefix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any Routing Call Type Add Entry characters support
16. added This page consists of the Group Name text field requiring the group name and the Group Description text field requiring the optional group description as well as standard Save and Back buttons to apply or abort changes Edit opens the Edit Group page where the service parameters can be modified It provides the same components as the Add Group page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear Please Note Changing a group name will also change the references to this group including groups where this group is a member of and all affected filter rules enabled and disabled ones in all chains Deleting a group will also delete any reference to the corresponding group including filter rules and member relations to the other groups Clicking on the Group name will display an IP Pool Group Configuration page with the Members list for the current group The IP Pool Group Configuration page displays a list of all the added member IP addresses for the selected group It offers the following components Current Group provides read only information about the current group name the members are listed for Add opens the Add Member page where a new member may be added Edit opens the Edit Members page where the service parameters can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add Member page To operate with Edit only one record may
17. is a valid pattern whereas 15 36 is not Please Note The symbol cannot be used to exclude a range of symbols For example 2 15 60 23 32 or 2 15 60 23 132 are not valid patterns To valid pattern will be to 2 15 22 33 60 The same as above with the exception that character ranges can include single digit character elements only Example The pattern is 2 1 5 a c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 215 225 235 245 255 2a5 2b5 2c5 Precedes a control symbol land to indicate that it is used as an ordinary character not a wildcard Example The pattern is 1 1 3 Numbers matching the pattern are 1 1 1 2 1 3 Please Note Patterns cannot be prefixed with the symbol The system considers the patterns starting with as feature codes and does not parse them through the Call Routing table 80 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Best Matching Algorithm All calls through and within a Quadro are made according to call routing patterns that specify a destination based on a dialed number When a user dials a number to make a call the Quadro matches the dialed number against the existing patterns that are specified in the Call Routing table If the dialed number matches only to a single pattern this pattern will be used to set up a call If several patterns have been found to match the number the Quadro uses the Best Matching Algorithm to prioritize the matching patter
18. server The Alternative Nameserver is used if the main Fig 11 188 DNS Settings page name server cannot be accessed DNS Server Settings The DNS Server on the Quadro provides the services to the hosts in the Quadro s LAN With this service Quadro returns the correct IP address to the requested domain name so that any device in the LAN can be accessed by its hostname or alternative alias name The DNS Server Settings page is used to configure DNS server settings on the Quadro and to define a list of aliases for the devices in the Quadro s LAN This page contains the following components Zone field displays the Quadro s host domain name as it is configured in the System Configuration Wizard Time to live TTL text field indicates the time in seconds DNS Server Settings during which the DNS server will keep the resolved names in its cache During this time the same address will be resolved from the cache of the DNS server When this timeout expires the requested address will be resolved newly Man System Uses Telephony hier ret Uplink Hotak Ai tilt Dolti Mail Exchange MX text field indicates the mail servers INTA hostname When resolving the email address the reference will go to the mail server defined in this field before being sent out to the external network The value in this field will be used in the MX record in the DNS server on the Quadro The table on this page lists aliases for each of the device i
19. the RADIUS server will be used to authenticate user and or to account for the call This can be accomplished by automatic detection of the caller s number or a customized login prompt where the caller is expected to enter a username and password Transactions between the client and the RADIUS server are authenticated through the use of a shared Secret Key which is never sent over the network In addition user passwords are encrypted when sent between the client and RADIUS server to eliminate the possibility of a party viewing an unsecured network where they could determine a user s password If no response from the RADIUS Server is returned after the Receive Timeout expires the request is resent numerous times as defined in the Retry Count list The client can also forward requests to an alternate server s if the primary server is down or unreachable An alternate server can be used after a number of failed tries to the primary server Once the RADIUS server receives the request it determines if the sending client is valid A request from a client that the RADIUS server does not recognize must be silently discarded If the client is valid the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose name matches the request The user entry in the database contains a list of requirements username password etc that must be met to give access to the user If all conditions are met the user gets access to the Quadro Network The RADIUS Clie
20. 192 168 73 10 Secondary nameserver 192 168 0 2 WWW epygi con resolved and answered epygi config loc not resolved STUN Network Address Translation NAT Check Reboot this Device Start ISDN Diagnostics dynamically via DHCP Client reached reached reached answered answered inologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 53 System Diagnostic page Show System Logs link leads to the page where Quadro s logs might be viewed downloaded and the logging setting may be adjusted System Logs The System Logs page is accessible by pressing the Show System Logs link on the Diagnostics page This page is used to adjust where system logging settings view system logs directly in your browser or download them locally to your PC The System Logs page consists of three sub pages Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 31 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The System Logs Settings page is used to adjust the system logging settings and contains the following components e The Enable User Logging checkbox is used to enable user level logging This logging contains brief information about events on the Quadro e The Enable Developer Logging checkbox is used to enable developer high level logging This logging contains detailed information about events on the Quadro e The Archived Logging checkbox is used to is used to keep more logs on the Quadro This option allows to collect more system information in the log files and
21. A T TTET 54 Call Back Services c oooocccccccccccccccnnn rr 56 TAEPO S a DIO E In A 57 e o PI A 57 alli io UP OO A E E E A 59 A RRA RR RR RRA 60 SIRO UNO fer et st ee ee ee et E 60 EE SO NG su AS AAA 61 Ai Se eN EEEE EEEE EE EEEE A 62 o E EIEEE EEEN EIEEE EETA A e Pr OOO E 64 IP Line Settings nr 64 Supported SUP PROMESA AAA EE al diia 65 Programmable Keys COniouralOn seuspscarassopracs anno nera EEE EEEREN O aonee 66 A E O CR CR CR CO OO OO un y ence ncn ner nc eee cn ner 67 cc nn e o eee er ee re ee 71 SIP Tunnel SettidgS 2 nr rr 72 A e nen seen Cnr Rete a a a Ae 73 Allowed Characters and Wildcards UU I I I GG UG I I GGG I GGG GE GG GOOG OG tnt ntnnnnnntnnnnnnnnnne 80 Best Matching AGON aE E EEEE AE E 81 YOP T N a a aaa A E ee ee 83 RADIU S CICIT o o a a ee E E E EE EE E EE ee 85 VOICE Nal Recording CONS emer TCT TTT TT TTT rr TT TT E CT 86 Deol lok 111140 lt 2c2ccceceeereceeeeeseetueenaeueseeeesennauenuedueceeeeseneqeeenaeueseeeees cosaccessacaceeccocessccessasusssocucesacacasusauateeeeedeeeneeueeoegeess 86 Ol CC A E Eo oA A oa 86 Key System EMulati0N ooocooccccccccccccccccnnnn rr 86 Key System Advanced Configuration rr A a n 89 A RR o gatamematecemamanaged AAAA NAAA AAAA AAAS ON 90 ic nn yO PEI AP 91 PPP PPTP S6ttidQS ocooccocccccnccnnnnnnnncnn rn EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EDD E EEE ESSE DEES EE ESE EAE EEE ESS SEE SEES SS EE EEE ES GSEE EE ESSERE SEES SEEEEES 91 PAN UNG de SV AA o y ago
22. Add Entry The Option Name drop down list contains the most Predefined Optone oggon Hame common DHCP server options Option Value 2 Quatom Options The Option Value text field requires the value for the selected option The type and format of the value ee aaa inserted in this field is dependent on the option a selected from the Option Name drop down list e Custom this selection allows you to define a new DHCP server options The following parameters are required to be inserted for a new option Capeigh Ch Corel Teran Lid AB right mse Fig 11 195 DHCP Advanced Settings Add Entry The Option Code text field is used to insert a code of the option It may have values in a range from 0 to 255 The Option Value Type drop down list is used to select the type of the option value It may be an IP address a boolean or integer value etc Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 107 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Option Value text field is used to insert the value of an option Depending on the selected Option Value Type this field should have the corresponding value Warning messages will prevent saving if the value inserted in this field does not correspond to the requirements of the Option Value Type If an array should be inserted here the values should be separated with a comma DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface is used to establish virtual netwo
23. Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Disconnected Mode shows the number of packets when the connection is being disconnected Disconnect shows the number of packets upon connection termination Unnumbered Acknowledgement shows the number of packets upon accepting connection establishment termination Framer shows the number of packets as a result of an error condition TEI Request shows the number of packets containing TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier to initiate subscription of the device in the network Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of broadcast signaling packets received for call initiation and termination Exchange Identification shows the number of received packets containing connection management settings ISDN BRI Layer 2 Errors statistics Incorrect Length shows the number of packets with an incorrect length Bad Supervisory Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect supervisory header Bad Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered information frame header Bad Frame Type shows the number of packets with a bad frame type Bad Unnumbered Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered acknowledgement frame header Foreign TEI Value shows the number of packets with a bad or foreign TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier value ISDN BRI Layer 3 statistics Active Calls shows the number of currently active calls in the selected trunk Outgoing Calls shows th
24. Cenamic OHS Darmian ATTENTION After pirining Mead woul hie Hass Rack gt hh TOT Eprgi Tei rolegias LA All ghia ito rene Fig 11 45 Firmware Update page 1 The following main processes will be stopped during the firmware update and will be restarted after the installation is completed e Voice Software e Network Time Protocol Daemon e Network Interface Statistic Daemon e Dynamic DNS Daemon Next will move you to the second page of Firmware Update where the image file should be selected Attention Pressing the Next button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your device manually even if you have cancelled the firmware update procedure on the following steps Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 28 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Man System tsers Tedoglecary iefet met Uplink Het ca kh Firmware update The second page of Firmware update has a Browse button used to browse the image file and the Specify Image text field that will display the selected image filename Pressing Save will start uploading the image file to the board and the next page will display results and verification of the image being burned Fig 11 46 Firmware Update page 2 Ban Sytem Users Telephony bien Uplink Network CP epygi This page displays non editable information about the ia image validity The Image Check field will display invalid Firmwa
25. Change values in Packetization Interval and or enable disable Silence Suppression 4 To save the codec settings press Save or to keep the initial data click Back NAT Traversal Settings The NAT Traversal Settings page is divided into separate pages used to configure General NAT settings SIP NAT parameters RTP and STUN parameters for NAT and a page where the NAT Exclusion table may be filled The General Settings page consists of a manipulation radio buttons group to select the mode of the NAT Traversal usage for the SIP traffic any incoming and outgoing SIP messages from See wore A and to the Quadro will be routed through the NAT PC NAT Traversal Settings e Automatic with this selection system will analyze the Quadro s WAN IP address and if it is in the IP range specified for local networks according to RFC the SIP traffic will be routed through NAT Otherwise if Quadro s WAN IP address is outside the specified IP range no SIP traffic will be routed through NAT server General Sot e Force with this selection all the SIP traffic will be routed through the NAT server e Disable with this selection no SIP traffic will be routed Fig 11 112 General NAT traversal page through the NAT server The SIP Parameters page is used to configure NAT specific settings for SIP and offers two independent groups of settings UDP Parameters Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of connection
26. Edit opens the Edit Entry page where the IP range can be modified Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Man Smiem Users Telephon iieri Uplink Het ca NAT Traversal Settings fad Fin Debie Select all fea ee Selec Fig 11 116 NAT Exclusion Table page This page includes the same components as the Add Entry page 63 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The NAT Exclusion Table lists all possible IP ranges that are not included in the NAT process but may be accessed directly IP addresses that are not listed in the NAT Exclusion Table are accessed over NAT Mii System hers Dcdi jiliecal ryt fiat er tee Lali etic NAT Traversal Settings NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry P clipbeara IP address requires the IP address that is placed behind NAT oy within the local network 255 zee aes Lie ciipbesra_ Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask corresponding to the specified IP address Fig 11 117 NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry page To Configure the NAT Exclusion Table 1 Press the Add button on the NAT Exclusion Table page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window 2 Specify an IP Address and its Subnet Mask in the corresponding text fields 3 Press Save on the Add Entry page to add the selected IP range to the NAT Exclusion Table list To Delete an IP Range from the NAT Exclusion Table 1 Select the checkboxes of the corresponding IP range s that should to be deleted from
27. IP address where incoming packets should be routed through Add opens the Add IP Static Route page where a new static route can be established Enable Disable is used to activate and deactivate a selected route s At least one route should be selected in order to use these functions otherwise the following error message will appear No record s selected The Add IP Static Route page offers the following components Route To requires the IP address and subnet mask for the destination the IP packet should be forwarded to Via IP Address requires the IP address of the subsequent router for IP packet forwarding to the specified destination Attention The rule with the longest subnet smallest IP range will take effect when having two or more IP Static routing rules with the coinciding subnets IP Policy Routes allow IP packets forwarding to the specified router depending on the source IP address as well as defining the priority for the current routing rule The IP Policy Routes table displays all specified IP policy routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Priority for the route priority Route From is where the subnet routed packets come from and Via IP Address is where the router IP address incoming packets should be routed through Add opens the Add IP Policy Route page to establish a new polic
28. Last registered Expires in Binding IP address First Call state Caller Party Call type Call start time Call duration Codec 12 lacIP2 Off Hook 1 locext1 2 01 Sep 2008 17 21 43 56 min 4 sec 172 30 0 253 In Call Liana Badalyan 20232 sip epygi com External IP Call 01 Sep 2008 17 25 31 8 sec PCMU Autoredial Unconditional Forwarding Outgoing Call Blocking Distinctive Ringing Intercom Service Voice Mail Service Hold Music Call Waiting Call Queue Hiding Caller Info Voice Mailbox Do Not Disturb Hot Line No Entry Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled No Entry No Entry Disabled Disabled Used Internal Own Music Enabled Enabled Disabled No Entry 1 Entry Disabled Disabled Calls Call State shows the current state of the extension in voice mail in call waiting busy call out ring in etc Group List 1 Entry Copyright C 2003 2008 Epy i Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Caller Party appears when a call is received and indicates the caller extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Fig 11 17 Lines Status Lines Status page upon established call Called Party appears when a call is placed and indicates the destination extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Call Type shows whether the call is Internal or External and whether i
29. Loss cuims Via Siem Losa e Enable Remote Logging Telnet via 645 port F Enable all Controlling Log Enable iF User Agent Log E Enable Medis Stream Leg Enable DSF Leg le Enable SIP Registration Log yl Bates Speteen Messages Log E Enable FO Log Enable volore Mail System Log H Enable SPUG Agent Log 4 Gentle CAS User Leg z Enable CAS Nel Log z Brabe SOH Le Log F Enable SDN L3 LOG sw Bax sete LEJ A ngm Ahia Fig Il 55 System Logs System Remote Logs Settings page ETA AE j Main System Users Telephony leerme Uli Network O pr Pa AS System Logs DSP e Logs Seinas Wini Siete Logs sasun A O AA i i Om 2007 aran DESA 635 FS anid umati a 537 SYS Senn DEF CPU boquency 200 BAe BES SYS Se ching PORTO Charts 4 hhh PMS Stopped 697 FES Shared tress 2 05 5 11 055 PS 18 TH Gain satii 0 dE 056 FO 16 Pe Gain eel fo b oe DSE FRO IT TO Gain Getto Ode 057 Pe 17 AX Gain sel lo E del 05 53 78163 SVE Switching PORTI Modes 1 Codec 0 Channels 2 3 220 EXC Entering normal m de brit 451 ab ER 16 ate onhook 477 FO 17 Sista anhaok 105 5330 3965 FS oppid 390 FES Shared toe siote 2 300 SYS Changing syne lo Mero 050533 425 FAG 16 Contig Gah 200 state 1 Ring slop on O27 FeO E Siete onhook 446 PH 16 Seling ting deleci n patlama count i 447 Add 16 CIO FSk Detect at ERP Rim 16 CID OTM Delectnol hound 05 53 5 008 FS 17 Config CSRS 200 eats 1 Ring slop Bm 037 FRO 17 Si
30. Phone database When the system accepts the settings the corresponding entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database The detected PSTN caller address must correspond to the one applied by the caller the ISDN line must be available on the Quadro there must be network connectivity and the destination must be reachable The PSTN caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the PSTN caller will be reconnected to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Non Permanent Call Back configuration service allows the trusted caller to organize one time Call Back to the defined PSTN destination In this situation no entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s PSTN number that is previously routed to the Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller is able to use the 5 menu see Feature Codes to modify the Call Back destination for the already registered Caller in the Authorized Phones Database The system will ask the caller to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in the Call Back settings After successful login the PSTN caller should follow the voice instructions for reconfiguring the existing entry in Authorized Phone database The detected PSTN caller address must correspond to t
31. Press the Delete button on the Authorized Phones Database page 5 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel the action by clicking on No Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 55 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Call Back Services With Call Back service PSTN callers can save a call charge when calling to and through Quadro Quadro provides the possibility of creating a list of those trusted PSTN callers that are allowed to make free of charge calls to Quadro s Auto Attendant or through its Call Relay menu to the third party IP or PSTN destination Two types of Call Back services are available on the Quadro Pre configured Call Back and Remote Call Back Configuration Pre Configured Call Back For Pre configured Call Back a list of trusted PSTN callers must be configured in the Quadro s Authorized Phones Database using Web Management The Call Back service should be enabled and a valid callback destination should be specified for each PSTN caller To use Pre configured Call Back the PSTN caller registered in the Authorized Phones Database simply calls to the PSTN number attached to the Quadro from the global PSTN network Let the call to ring twice and then hang up Call Back will be instantly activated and Quadro will call back to the defined Call Back destination By answering the incoming call the PSTN party will be connected to the Auto Attendant menu Remote Call Back The Remote Call Back Configurat
32. Quadro The feature is useful to the ISPs in order to set the restrictions for certain customers to manage the Quadro s configuration Two levels of Quadro GUI administration are available o Administrator this is the main administrators account The administrator can configure to have the factory reset safe the default password or choose not to The administrator has access to all Web GUI pages and no one else has configuration permission to adjust this account The administrator is responsible for granting access to all other user groups 0 Local Administrator this is a common sub administrator s account The password is not factory reset safe Local Administrator can have permission to adjust each GUI page o Extension this account refers to all extensions created on the Quadro The password for default extensions is not factory reset safe but is contained in the backed up configuration Permissions for an extension to access each GUI page can be adjusted here The User Rights Management page consists of two pages The Users page is used to manage the available users on the Quadro The Roles page is used to assign the corresponding permissions to the users Man System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Nel acah The Users page contains a table where the Administrator and Local Administrator users are listed This page allows them to User Rights Management modify the passwords of available users in the table and to tee
33. Range e WNS Sener server on Quadro for VLAN With this checkbox enabled ofa fnna m11 wats 1 10 50 10 Quadro will be able to assign dynamic IP addresses to the devices in its VLAN Activate functional button is used to activate DHCP service on one of the VLAN interfaces in the list Only one VLAN interface can have DHCP service activated Edit functional button opens a page where the corresponding VLAN interface can be configured and controlled This page contains all the same components as Fig 1196 DHCP Setinos page for VLAN interlace the DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface page does Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep yl quadro VLAN Settings Enable Disable Add Edit Delete Select all Inverse Selection ple fe fons VLAN Settings page lists all existing virtual interfaced created on the Quadro and allows you to create new Please check your pending events interfaces Mee opyn Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to j correspondingly enable and disable the selected virtual Fig Il 197 VLAN Settings interface s Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 108 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new virtual network can be defined The page consists of the following components Enable checkbox is used to select whether the corresponding virtual interface will be enabled or disabled after it is created Interface T
34. SIP destination to another through the Quadro s Auto Attendant Each group of parameters describes characteristics of a piece of RTP stream composing an overall SIP session Normally one leg describes the RTP stream from caller to the Quadro and the other leg describes the RTP stream from Quadro to the destination Mam Sytem Uses Talegdrcery hara rt Link Meatwwcak Quality estimated call quality which depends on RTP statistic Below is the legend for Call Quality definitions on the displayed RTP Statistics excellent RX Lost Packets lt 1 amp RX Jitter lt 20 good RX Lost Packets lt 5 amp RX Jitter lt 80 satisfactory RX Lost Packets lt 10 8 RX Jitter lt 150 bad RX Lost Packets lt 20 RX Jitter lt 200 very bad RX Lost Packets gt 20 or RX Jitter gt 200 The Source and Destination fields indicate the two peers between which the RTP stream is transmitted The characteristics in the table below describes to the piece of RIP stream between these peers RTP Statistics Rx Tx Codec codec for received and transmitted RTP stream respectively Rx Tx Packets number ofRIP packets received and transmitted respectively Rx Tx Packet Size size of RTP packet payload received and transmitted respectively Rx Lost Packets number of lost RTP packets for received stream Rx Jitter inter arrival jitter is an estimate of the statistical variance of the RTP data packet inter arrival time measured in
35. Settings Independent Mailbox Type Mailbox URI o Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 74 Extensions Management Edit Entry Voice Mailbox Settings page Go To Line Settings For each of these selections it is required to enter the SIP URI of the Voice Mail Server where voice mails of the corresponding extension will be collected The Transport Protocol for SIP messages radio buttons allow the transport protocol UDP or TCP for transmission of SIP messages to be selected Attention By choosing the Use External Voice Mail option some internal voice mailbox services may become unavailable Instead the services of the external voice mail server will become available to the user Please consult with the external voice mail server administrator before enabling this option Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 41 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Telephony krinet Upins Network Extensions Management Edit Entry 7 Licensing License Settings 11 This page is only available if the corresponding licensing is enabled from the Features page Enable OCM Quadro Communkation Manager license This group allows you to configure the extension to be used by the Quadro Communication Manager QCM soft phone application The page contains Enable QCM Quadro Communication EPIT Manager license checkbox whic
36. The MSN number can be assigned to the Quadro s extensions to the Auto Attendant or to the routing agent The destination selected from this page will ring upon incoming call to the corresponding MSN number comes in Mam System Users Telephony her mel Ud Metwork The fields in the MSN Number column require the MSN ee numbers allocated to the Quadro Routing Settings Please Note At least one MSN number should be defined in this page The system displays an error message if the same MSN number is used twice in this page The Route Incoming Call to drop down lists are used to select 521002 the destination where the incoming call addressed to the certain 521003 MSN number will be routed Choosing the Routing with 521004 inbound destination number selection will automatically use 521008 the initially dialed number to connect the destination without any 621006 additional dialing If MSN is disabled on the ISDN Wizard MSN 521007 Settings page the ISDN Wizard Routing Settings page 521000 contains only one Route Incoming Call to drop down list 531009 Selecting the Use Default outgoing Caller ID allows you to 521010 overwrite the source caller information with the one specified in the Default outgoing Caller ID field when placing outgoing calls toward the CO The Default outgoing Caller ID field requires the caller ID for the outgoing calls from the Quadro through the ISDN trunk That number should be registered at the CO and can be one of
37. VPN gateway device must have a fixed IP address for Internet access Every VPN needs at least one VPN gateway with a fixed IP address The partner devices of a VPN must have different WAN IP addresses and if they are connected to local area networks these LAN s must have different IP addresses As all Quadro devices have the same default IP addresses on delivery at least one of them must be reconfigured in order to set a new IP address Quadro supports several kinds of VPN connections such as IPSec L2TP and PPTP Man Stem Users Telaphony fer reed Ugena Metin kh The VPN Configuration page offers IPSec Configuration and VPN Configuration PPTP L2TP Configuration links that lead to the corresponding feature settings pages Attention It is strongly recommended not to run different types of VPN tunnels between the same endpoints simultaneously Fig 11 160 VPN Configuration page An IPSec connection includes authentication and encryption to protect data integrity and confidentiality VPNs are virtual in the sense that individuals can use the public Internet as a means of securely accessing an internal network Once the IPSec connection is established users have access to the same network resources addresses and so forth as if they were connected locally VPNs are private because the data is encrypted between two VPN gateways Encryption makes it very difficult for anyone to intercept data and capture sensitive information s
38. a custom language for GUI and Voice Messages of the Quadro The language of voice messages can be switched to the custom Language Pack language from the GUI setting page in the System Configuration Wizard The language of GUI session can be changed to the custom Language Pack language from the radio buttons on the login page Uploading a language pack will also change the language of some supported IP phones Aastra snom v 6 x Grandstream GXP2000 After a custom Language Pack is uploaded onto the system reboot the IP phone to load a matching language onto the phone Uploading a Language Pack will cause the loss of the following data e All voice mails and custom voice messages e Call statistics e Pending events e Transfer statistics Please Note Only one custom Language Pack can be uploaded at the time Uploading a Language Pack will remove the existing one if applicable and will reboot the Quadro The Current Language Pack field displays read only information about the custom language pack uploaded When no custom language pack is uploaded the field indicates unknown Below there is a Language Pack File to Upload text field that displays the selected image filename The Browse button is used to browse the custom language pack to be uploaded Main Sysiem Users Telephony internet Uplink Network Upload Language Pack netalling of remming a language pack will case Arebool Anew language pack replaces the ansing one L
39. add a rule for it The corresponding Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Click Add on the Filtering Rules page A page where a new rule may be added will appear in the browser window The page will be named corresponding to the selected filter 3 Select a service name from the Service list to configure a rule for it If the list has a default value do not change the default values 4 Select an action from the Action list that is used in the rule If the list has a default value do not change the default values 5 Enter the IP address in the Forward to IP field if an Incoming Traffic Rule is to be added 6 Choose the restriction type by selecting Any Single IP IP Mask or Single URL and enter the required information in the text fields or select a group 7 Insert a Description if needed 8 To add a rule with these parameters press Save To Delete Filtering Rules 1 Select the Filter link to delete a rule from its table The appropriate Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding rules that should be deleted from the rules table Press Select all if all rules should to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the Filtering Rules page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel by clicking on No Service Pool The Service Pool table is a list of all created services and their parameters It is used to add new services with the appropriate settings prot
40. allows setting up a firewall configuring the security level and enabling the NAT and IDS services of Quadro A Firewall is a security service configured by the Quadro administrator based on various criteria The firewall allows or blocks traffic based on policies services and or IP addresses The firewall has several levels of security policies low medium or high The administrator may add additional service based rules Filtering rules will take effect only if the Firewall has been enabled and are independent from the selected firewall security level NAT Network Address Translation is used to allow Quadro LAN members to connect to the Internet using Quadro s WAN IP address The Quadro NAT also handles forwarding incoming packets from the WAN to the PCs or devices on Quadro s LAN The IDS Intrusion Detection System is a type of firewall but together with deleting dangerous packets or packets containing intrusion attacks IDS generates a log file with information about these dropped packets and the senders responsible for those packets The log can be viewed on the IDS Log page and notifications about them can be sent to the user in various ways such as e mail flashing LED and display notification The Firewall Configuration page offers the following components The Enable IDS checkbox selection enables the Intrusion Detection System The Enable NAT checkbox selection enables Network Address Translation The Enable Firewall checkbox sele
41. are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings while General Settings page has a different content 1 General Settings for paging group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Man Shem Weer Hepi miene Uplink Helen k Cepygi Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the Extensions Management Edit Entry caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed aE FAA Seinge 33 Password requires a password for the new extension foe Paging Group The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Password confirm Fig 11 81 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for paging extension page The Edit Paging Group link leads to the page where a list of extensions to be paged is created Quadro4Li SW Version ER Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Man Stem Users lelephony een reed plk Hetero k Paging Group of Extension 67 Add ele Select all hese Select The Paging Group of Extension page lists all to be paged i e those that will automatica
42. board s factory default configuration By restoring the default configuration you will replace your current configuration lose all voice mails and reboot the device You will not be automatically redirected to the GUI start page After the successful reboot you will need to enter into the management page and login again to access the Quadro s configuration A warning message will ask you to confirm your selection before restoring the default configuration Please Note Unlike the factory default settings restore procedure initialized from the Reset button on the Quadro board this link will keep the following data e Call Statistics e Transfer Statistics Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 21 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide e System Events e Feature Keys e Device Registration state The Automatic Firmware Update link leads you to the page where the automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image can be configured The Download current configuration in a legible format and Upload a legible configuration file links leads you to the Legible Configuration Management page where legible configuration can be downloaded and uploaded back after the required edits Automatic Firmware Update The Automatic Firmware Update page allows you to configure an automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image as it becomes available on the server When this service is enabled on the configured day and time Quadro will automat
43. components as the Add IPSec Connection page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise an error message One row must be selected appears Restart all Connections restarts all active IPSec connections The State of these IPSec connections will turn into Connected or Activated if the restart procedure has been successfully completed RSA Key Management leads to the RSA Key Management page to see the current RSA key to generate a new one and to send it to the peer via e mail The first IPSec Connection Wizard page Add IPSec Connection has the Connection Name text field that requires a new mandatory IPSec connection name If the text field is not filled in the error message otherwise an error will occur Error Incorrect connection name will appear Please Note The input in the Connection Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and IPSec connection cannot be created The Peer type drop down list is used to choose the remote Main System Users Telphomy maemetUpink Network machine type for the IPSec Connection to be established If the list does not include the required type of machine choose IPSec Connection Wizard Other Add IPSec Connection The VPN Network Topology drop down list allows you to select the location of the peers participating to the VPN connection The following options are present in the list e Quadro lt gt Peer direct connection between Quadro and a pee
44. connection is reestablished Authentication User Name requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should be provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested for some SIP servers only For others the field should be left empty Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP registration server accessibility to the verification mechanism Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts for the SIP registration server accessibility verification If no reply is Mala Geter Users Tohphory O Waem lnk nto pysi received from the primary SIP server within this timeout the Secondary SIP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will resume being sent to it Extensions Management Edit Entry SIP Advanced Settings 11 HP S hanced Seringas The RTP Priority Level drop down list is used to select the priority low medium or high of the RTP packets sent from a SIP Ajram Satiini Ahenienton esr Mama 01kghladk09 Hqkrasa corresponding extension RTP packets with higher priority will A E gana Kawale Meseeges 1O Proxy be sent first in case of heavy traffic a Tenoouttsoc 5 The Do Not Use SIP Old Hold Method checkbox enables the ias new recommended method of call hold in SIP in which case the Cuna Prasy hold request is indicated with the a sendonly media attribute tse Host address sina era com rather than with the IP address of 0 0 0 0 used before The eee
45. connections to the same gateway using the same protocol cannot be distinguished Previous Fig 11 165 IPSec Connection Wizard Manual Keying Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 95 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The public key is displayed in the RSA Public Key text field so that the user may inform their IPSec connection partner about it for example via fax The user has the option of generating a new pair of keys by specifying the key length with the corresponding radio buttons Generate a new 1024bit RSA Key and Generate a new 2048bit RSA Key and Main System Users Telephony imermet Uplnk Hework then clicking the Generate Button RSA Key Management A valid RSA key should fit to following requirements 1 A D I F Eiri 1 io mr e O RSA key doesn t start with Os Os A0NYOs 4k YOREnn Ath akericd diana epi com nb pr lsJoalbasplllLastdkedeyeroa atera iiO y eee yy Sand e RSA key doesn t end with e RSA key contains symbols other than Alphanum Gor rabo The Email this to the peer text field requires the Back mailing address of the IPSec connection partner The Send button will insert Quadro s public RSA key into an e mail and send it to the IPSec connection partner patata tly 2007 Eno Fig 11 166 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection RSA Key Settings page PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol is used to establish a virtual p
46. does much more Your Quadro IP PBX The Global Phone Network in a Box operates in much the same way as systems with which you are already familiar a telephone a PBX voice mail a phone book et cetera Beyond that the Quadro4Li IP PBX provides capabilities you never believed were accessible in a customer premise telephony product Soon you will experience the freedom and power of the Quadro4Li IP PBX The Global Phone Network in a Box To get started the following information is helpful PHONES Your extension number is lt extension number gt and your password is lt password gt optional Remember to type the Auto Attendant number when you pick up your phone receiver to find THE WELCOME SPOT 0 will take you directly to voice mail for your extension 74 will confirm your extension number LOCAL PHONE LINES The Quadro4Li offers 4 external phone lines They are lt 1 local phone line gt lt 2 local phone line gt lt 3 local phone line gt lt 4 local phone line gt IP To reach your Quadro Voice Router from a network connection inside your office home or place of utilization connect a Web browser to IP address lt IP address gt 172 30 0 1 is the default IP address The email address of your Quadro Voice Router System Administrator is lt email address gt The phone number of your Quadro Voice Router System Administrator is lt phone numbers gt SIP Your SIP number an Internet phone number is lt SIP number g
47. duration sec Each Voice Mail Profile may have custom voice mail greeting maximum voice mail duration new voice mail notifications ee ere and Zero Out settings The Voice Mail Profiles are activated Send datetime information message based on the call routing rule used to establish a call This is 7 Send beep atthe end of message Tenable Zerodut limited to the PBX Voicemail type of calls used for a direct access to the extension s voice mailbox The Voice Mail i Redirectcallype PBX y Profile name should be provided in the Call Routing wizard Silent VM recording when defining a PBX Voicemail routing rule When the rule is Send new voiceral ntication via e mal Redrectadress used caller accesses the called extension s mailbox with the settings configured in the corresponding voice mail profile Emal adrese Enable Fax Redirection Voice Mail With this service you can pre configure several versions of oa ina Voice Mail Settings and save them as Voice Mail Profiles For Remove alce Mali On Send example if a call is originated from the PSTN network to the Fa Enable Out Ofic ee panang See O mae De greeting Remove Fax On Send l Restore default out of ofice greeting fle message can tell the caller You have reached the company please leave a message and the maximum voice Send new voice message notifications via SMS Upload new out of ofice greeting file mail duration is configured to 15 minutes This voice mail profile can be sav
48. ea rae ee ASE AT 91 Mc oO A 92 Pa A O eee ere ere ee 98 Pike Wall QU INAV A Mn IU PP O PR EU RE O O RO O DU o O O RO o ee 99 Advanced Firewall SENOS vna IA Ra a E a aA WTAE 100 FSA AUS sara A SARA 100 o e PE o E o o o eae tesesccass 102 a PP o nn SE ERE EOS E O ES OR O E O PS CEP E E En 103 nn PA FP A o ee 104 o nn mn nn RO OOO E E ges ee ae ec eee eee 105 DNS SOMOS a tete butano tana coi 105 Pia G PO e o A e o PES E O O O O IA A 105 DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface oooocccccccccccccccccnncnnncncnnnn nr 106 Brea A y ee ee ne ee nn eee ree 107 DHCP Settings for the VLAN Itaca aa 108 PEGs anon Ol aa leas 109 Administrator s elicits i tt tt ht E ne ee 109 incoming Gall Blocking and Outgoing Gall BIOCKINO aaa 109 rr E E ccc PP o Pp eee ere eee eee ere ec ee ac E E eee eee eect 110 A E cepk ease naar maar nnen noun nmiaaname meeps NObieGs wane obOmbaeaNyaamads merenairaien 112 FBXSenIcos io Quadro Omer atOt areren rnnr NINEN E ES E A aE rte 113 Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page ssssssssrnsrsrrsrrsrrrrerrerrrrrrrnrrrrrnrerrerrrrrrenrrrrrrrrnrenrerrrrerrerrnrrerenne 114 Appendix System Default Valls isa repre iaa rta 115 cis AA e O o ge eii E 115 dis glo Lol eect oh tert nn y Er A e E nr rn 118 Appendix Software License AGreeine Ml evocar rara da 120 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Manual Ill see Extension User s Guide Describes detailed the menus available for extension users and includes furth
49. enabled The alternating Hide disabled IP lines and Show disabled IP lines buttons are used to respectively hide or show the IP lines that have not been activated with a feature key To enable the lines install a feature key from the Features page The IP Lines table lists all available IP lines with additional information about each of them number of the extension attached to it information about the phone type and the configuration details Each column heading in the tables is link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading By pressing on the IP line link in the Available IP Lines column the Edit IP Line page specific for the current IP line is opened This page offers a group of manipulation radio buttons that allows you to enable the IP line and to configure it to for use by the SIP phones Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x BH Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Inactive this selection disables the corresponding IP line SIP Phone this selection configures the IP line for a SIP phone to be connected to the Quadro s LAN e Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist The drop down list excluding Other selection enables the MAC address text fields used to insert the MAC Address of the corresponding SIP phone U
50. for PSTN a PSTN number is required Auto is used for undefined call types destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Call Routing table If this field is left empty the callers address will be implied as a callback destination Please Note The Call Back service is functional and enabled only for PSTN callers To Add an Authorized phone to the database Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones Database page Press the Add button on the Authorized Phones Database page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the call type and enter a caller address in the corresponding text field Select a Login Extension and the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox if required Enable Call Back service if required and define a Call Back Destination in the same named field Fill in an optional Description in the appropriate field if required Press Save to submit the settings oer eS YS To Delete an Authorized phone from the database 1 Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page 2 Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones Database page 3 To remove an authorized phone s select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding records that should be deleted from the Authorized Phones Database table Press Select all if all records should be deleted 4
51. instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer or busy the call will automatically get back to the receptionist When this service is not enabled the incoming call will reach the Voice Mail Service or the call queue of the called extension depending on the extension user s configuration Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 51 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide If you have selected the 55i 57i Snom 360 or Grandstream GXP2000 IP phones from the Phone Model drop down list the next page in the wizard will be the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules For all other phone models this page is skipped For Snom 360 and Grandstream GXP2000 IP phones this page contains a single checkbox only The Enable Expansion Module checkbox is used to enable the supplementary module attached to the IP phone The Expansion Modules Count drop down list allows you to select how many additional expansion modules will be connected to the IP phone When the module is selected the number of programmable keys on the next page of the wizard is multiplied accordingly For Aastra 55i and 57i IP phones Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules page contains a number of drop down lists to select the types of the expansion modules and the sequence in which they are connected to the IP p
52. is not IPSec Connection Wizard possible if this Gateway is positioned behind NAT since the IP address of the remote gateway is not reachable directly in IPSec Connection Properties toQuadro99 this case Quadro lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from the local bn Quadro to the remote VPN gateway local subnet and remote e Ps subnet are not included This includes management access emote Gateway 190 210 81 07 The checkbox is disabled when Eaua i se Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer or E ii Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer the is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the i e Su IPSec Connection Wizard eo i r ie tipo a Local Subnet lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from all n iz 1 _cisbosed stations connected to the local network to the remote VPN gateway device local Quadro and remote subnet are not included The checkbox IS disabled when Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Fig 11 163 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties Quadro lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from the local Quadro to all stations of the remote LAN local subnet and remote VPN gateway devices are not included The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN N
53. on the Quadro This feature key allows you to activate a package of 8 IP lines support e QCM Support allows Quadro s extensions to be used by Quadro Communication Manager after QCM trial period expires Depending on the feature key type additional 4 or 10 QCM licenses can be activated on the Quadro To enter a Feature Key click Add A page with the Feature Key text field is opened Enter the key and press Save The status of the selected feature entry will change to Reboot needed Reboot the Quadro and the feature will receive the status Activated To receive a Feature Key register the Quadro device and send a corresponding request to Epygi s Technical Support This request must include the Unique ID that is displayed in the Features page above the features list Upload Language Pack Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi quadro Features Unique ID 09 5 0 4 010900 Add Upgrade additional Features Status Name Debug Enables Debug support Activated 3pcc f l Support Support for Third Party Call Control Free trial IP Phone Support for additional LAN sided IP Phones 8 users support ACM P Full support for Quadro Communication Manager Free trial Support Fig 11 57 Features page Main System Users Teleptsery kmene Lplnh Features UCR IA i ON FAA DIANA e sm Back Fig 11 58 Features Add page The Upload Language Pack page allows you to upload
54. or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The Add functional button refers to the Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page where new trusted users may be entered Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x BH Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Tetephory menet Upik Network The Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page offers two groups of input options Authorized Phones Database Add Entry Caller Settings The Call Type drop down list includes possible incoming call types PSTN SIP or Auto In SIP the caller connects Quadro through a SIP server and PSTN means the caller is a PSTN user Auto is used for undefined call types and the destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing The Caller Address text field requires the callers SIP address or PSTN number to be added to the trusted phones list The PSTN number length depends on the area code and phone number The wildcard is supported in this field If the caller address already exists in the Authorized Phones Database the error message The record already exists appears when selecting the Save button Fig 11 101 Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page The Login Extension drop down list provides all existing extensions on the Quadro When calling the Quadro Auto Attendant a trusted user will automatically be logged in as the select
55. over NAT Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of Mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT STUN NAT Traversal Settings settings are configured on the STUN parameters page see below Mam System Users Telephony BAe Uptre Network SP Parameters Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT Mapped Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP UDP traffic over NAT Mapped Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT TCP Parameters Mapped Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP TCP traffic over NAT Mapped Port requires the port number on the mapped host Fig 11 113 SIP Parameters page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 62 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide for the SIP TCP traffic over NAT The RTP Parameters page is used to choose between the STUN and Manual NAT traversal connection for the RTP traffic and to define the RTP RTCP ports for the connection over NAT Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of connection over NAT Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of Mapped settings for the RTP UDP traffic over NAT STUN settings are configured on the STUN Parameters page see below Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the RTP RTCP port ranges for the RTP traffic over NAT e The M
56. quadro Refresh in 887 seconds Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network The General Information page includes the following information Uptime duration Period Quadro is on since last reboot Device hostname Quadro device host name Quadro Operating System Quadro operating system version Quadro Status General Information General Information Uptime duration 54 min 42 sec Device hostname quadro Quadro Operating system 5 0 3 root Delta epygi loc Application Software 5 0 3 Release Network Status Lines Status Memory Status Application Software Software and file system versions of SS T A asin DSP Software ISDN_G Version 5 0 9 H41 33 Date Jul 7 2008 16 12 Boot Loader Quadro boot loader version DSP Software Quadro DSP software version and the date of build Language Pack this field is present only when the custom _J eevrisht lt c 2003 2008 Epyai Te language pack is uploaded and it indicates the version License Status imologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 13 Quadro Status General Information page Network Status The Network Status page includes the following information about Interfaces ro Cecpysi quadro Refresh in 895 seconds Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Interface Name lists the Network interfaces available on the Quadro LAN WAN IPSec and a number of PPPs depending Quadro Status Network Status
57. requires the connection peer name If you are about to create a client connection then the server s name should be defined here If you are creating a server connection then the client s name should be defined here Please note When creating a connection with a Windows Server ensure that a user with the Quadro s host name and Dial in access exists on the server When creating a connection with a Windows Client ensure that the Peer name specified on this page matches the Dial in connection s username Please Note The input in the Peer Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and no connection can be created The Password text field requires the password for the connection establishment Please Note These authentication settings should be identically configured on both peers for the successful connection establishment The manipulation radio buttons selection on this page allows you to choose whether the new connection will be a client or a server For the Client radio button selection no further details need to be provided For the Server radio button selection the following information needs to be provided For PPTP connection the PPTP Server text field requires an IP address or a host name of the PPTP server For L2TP connection the L2TP Server text fields require an IP address of the L2TP server The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are only present if the Connection Type sel
58. shown on the main page of the Quadro management Administrator s Additional Features explains some input options for administrators only that may be selected from the extension user s main page PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator explains PBX features for administrator accessible from the handset Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page includes a form that allows the administrator to inform his extension user with all individually needed addresses and phone numbers Appendix System Default Values lists all factory defaults Appendix Software License Agreement includes the contract for using Quadro s hardware and software Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 00 A Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Quadro s Graphical Interface Quadro s Graphical I nterface Administrator s Main Page When the administrator logs in the Quadro Management page is displayed with a table of active calls including information about call peers call duration and start time at the startup The button Terminate next to each active call is used to terminate the corresponding call Here the administrator may access the following settings and perform the actions epygl Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network rv oOo 04Li109 Refresh in 426 seconds Quadro4Li Management Active Calls Call Start Time Call Duration Calling Phone Called Phone No items in list Boot loader 4 1 0 Debug Develop Ima Firmware Version 5
59. specific number and then retrieve when they reach the conference room To use the Call Park feature the call parking service should be enabled for one or more extensions on the Quadro from the Extensions Management page To activate the Call Park service the Quadro user should dial the appropriate digit combination see Feature Codes during the call The destination party will be placed on hold while the SIP username of the first available extension is being configured for the call parking if the extension is registered on the SIP server The extension s PBX number will be played to the Quadro user The Call Parking is valid for 15 minutes During this time hold music if configured will be played to the parked destination party When the Call Park timeout expires the phone initiating the call parking will start to ring If no one picks up the parked call or if the phone is off hook the parked destination party will be automatically disconnected The pickup user will be able to pick up the parked call from any destination by calling the extension where the call has been parked Both PBX and IP calls are allowed For PBX calls the extension number should be dialed For IP calls the SIP address is played by the Quadro when activating the Call Park service if it is routed to the corresponding extension The pickup user will be prompted to pass the authentication by inserting the password of the Quadro user where the call has been parked in ord
60. table displayed in each page of Call Forwarding configuration lists the destinations where incoming calls addressed to the corresponding SLA line will be forwarded Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 88 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enable Disable functional button is used to enable disable the corresponding forwarding destinations This is helpful to avoid removing forwarding destination s if they are not applicable at the moment Add opens an Add Entry page where a new forwarding destination may be specified by its Call Type PBX SIP PSTN or Auto and depending on this call type by its extension number SIP address or PSTN number in the Forward to text field Only a SIP registration username can be inserted here to forward calls to the user registered at the same SIP server as the current extension is registered at i e if the SIP server hostname is left empty the system will automatically set the current extension s registration server hostname The extension number should be inserted in the Forward to text field for the PBX call type The PSTN number length depends on the area code and phone number When Auto is selected as a Call Type routing pattern will be considered here and parsed through Call Routing table Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network Cepysi para Y Forwarding List Add Entry Call Type JPFP w 5105 1th tpg iPod Forward Ta 27 gt Teese APrgLcom 3 F
61. that there is port forwarding configured for SMTP port 25 to the internal e mail server The easyDNS Partner text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider easyDNS Selecting the Create Custom HTTP GET Request radio button will switch to the custom settings of the DynDNS service Normally the DynDNS provider uses HTTP get requests to map dynamic IP addresses to host names If the HTTP receive request is known to you choose the Create Custom HTTP GET Request radio button and enter the appropriate value into the URL text field The selection enables the following optional settings The URL text field requires the complete request to be sent to the DynDNS server Normally it has the following format http www server domain port scriptpath scripiname param1 valuel8param2 value2 The request modifies the nameserver database so that the hostname will be resolved to the new IP address The Basic Authentication checkbox enables the encoding of the username and password entered in the text fields above and then uses the Basic Authentication method to notify the provider about the user authentication settings Most of the DynDNS providers require an authentication for security Authentication parameters can be provided in the URL text field to be used for the HTTP get request The Basic Authentication checkbox can be selected if no authentication parameters to be provided Firewall and NAT The Firewall Configuration page
62. the Codecs table G 726 24 ADPCM speech coding at 24 kbitis rate Disabled Each record in the table has an assigned checkbox They are used to a ila eeu a al mika select the record to be deleted or moved up or down C 0 726 40 ADPCM speech coding at 40 kbitis rate Disabled An error occurs if no records are selected and the user activates the AAA AI dain delete button the No records selected error message appears At Z Out of Band DTMF Transport least one codec must be attached to the line When attempting to delete the last codec the At least one codec should stay in the codec list error message will appear MENANI Paaa ENTOUR EAK C Enable Pass Through Modem D Enable T 38 FAX Enable Disable functional button is used to enable or disabled the corresponding codec for the extension When the codec is disabled the extension user will not be able to use it for placing a call Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved O Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls The Move Up Move Down buttons are used to move the selected f Fig Il 89 Extension Codecs list codec one level up down in the table Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 48 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Make preferred moves the selected codec to the top of the table setting its priority to the highest Clicking the Make preferred button when a disabled codec is selected will first enable th
63. the IP addresses the filters apply to if Main System Users Tehphomy eimi Uk Melo epygi Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Since it is read Filtering Rules only no modifications are allowed and no functional buttons are sae available View Filters for Policy Wie All The Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filter is for incoming traffic The rules here allow or deny systems on the Internet to reach the services of Quadro s LAN The NAT service should be enabled on the Quadro to provide the possibility of Port Forwarding in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering rules The Port Forwarding function will be unavailable if NAT is disabled on the Quadro The Outgoing Traffic filter is for outgoing traffic The rules here allow or deny Quadro s LAN users to reach external services Management Access is used to enable management access to the Quadro from the Internet A host on the Internet can be allowed to reach the Quadro Call Control Access is used to enable the access from the call controlling application from the Internet to the Quadro The call controlling applications can be used to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event Packet Filter Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 100 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus notifications from the Quadro Fig Il 176 Filtering Rules p
64. the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear Fig 11 69 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings page Attached Line lists all free lines to where an extension may be attached Please Note Extensions cannot be detached from the line if the SIP Remote Extension service is enabled on it To detach the extension from the line disable the SIP Remote Extension service on the extension first Use Kickback checkbox enables the Kickback service on the extension for the blind call transfer When the extension transfers the call to the other extension and if there is no answer from the destination side the call will automatically get back to the extension who initiated the transfer instead of getting into the destination s voice mailbox or being disconnected Allow Call Relay enables the current extension to be used to access the Call Relay service in the Quadro s Auto Attendant It is recommended to define a proper and non empty password when enabling this feature in order to protect the Call Relay service from an unauthenticated access Login Allowed checkbox enables the current extension to be used to access the Quadro via WEB interface by extension name and password When the External Call Policy checkbox is enabled all incoming IP calls to the corresponding extension will b
65. the selected criteria The search may be done with several criteria at the same time The Download Call Statistics links are available below all Call Statistics tables and allows you to download the displayed call statistics in a text file To Enable Disable the Statistics 1 Enter the Call Statistics Settings page 2 Select or deselect the Enable Call Reporting checkbox to enable or disable statistics recording 3 If enabling the statistics the maximum number of records to be stored in the statistics table should be selected from the corresponding drop down lists 4 Press Save to apply the new configuration To Filter the Statistics 1 Enter the desired criteria fields 2 Press the Filter button to search the call reports within the Call Statistics table Please Note To return to the complete Statistics Table clear all search criteria and press Filter To Reset the Statistics 1 Press the Clear All Records button in the Call Statistics Settings page 2 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes The call statistics will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the statistics information click on No RTP Statistics The RTP Statistics page provides detailed information about the established call is provided When Quadro serves as an RTP proxy this page displays two groups legs of RTP statistics For example when calling from an IP Phone attached to the Quadro s IP line to an external SIP destination or from one external
66. the tables is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column Upon sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed close to the column heading The Details column is only present in Successful Calls table and provides the following information e Brief information about the call quality voice codec used to receive and transmit packets and the close call reason The close call reason appears to provide more information about the call termination reason which can be a network problem termination by one of the call parties voice mail service activation etc Clicking on the details information will open the e RIP Statistics page where all RIP parameters of established call are provided e Authenticated By information about the callers that passed an authentication on the Quadro as configured in the Local AAA Table see Call Routing e Information about FAX statistics for the calls that have a FAX transmission handled It only appears when there was a FAX transmission during the call Clicking on the FAX link Fig ll 105 Call Statistics page in the Details column will move to the FAX Statistics page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 58 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Call Detail column is present only in the Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls table and indicates the reason why the call was unsuccessful The Filter performs a search procedure by
67. timestamp units Fig Il 106 RTP Statistics page The inter arrival jitter is defined to be the mean deviation smoothed absolute value of the difference D in packet spacing at the receiver compared to the sender for a pair of packets If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then for two packets i and j D may be expressed as D i j Rj Ri Sj Si Rj Sj Ri Si J i J i 1 ID i 1 1 J i 1 16 where J i is Rx Jitter for packet i For more details about Jitter calculations please refer to the RFC1889 Rx Maximum Delay maximum variance absolute value of actual arrival time of the RTP data packet compared to estimated arrival time measured in milliseconds If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then variance for packet i may be expressed as following V i Ri R1 Si S1 Ri Si R1 S1 Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 59 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Rx Maximum Delay max V i 8 RX Delay Increase Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is increased during the call RX Delay Decrease Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is decreased during the call Please Note RTP Statistics is logged only when at least one of the call endpoints is located on the Quadro
68. to be inserted e Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls through the ISDN Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing e Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where caller should be automatically forwarded in case of activating the ZeroOut feature Restore Default Greeting File will restore the default greeting file If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled Upload New Greeting File shows an attached greeting file selected by the current user The greeting file will be played to a caller party when it is entering the voice mail system The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will be received The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension In this situation the You do not have enough space warning will be received Optionally greeting file can be recorded from the phone handset see Feature Codes The Browse button helps to choose the desired greeting file that should be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format Down
69. to keep them longer Attention This option requires quite sufficient resources on the Quadro It is recommended to use this option in urgent cases only Administrator s Menus Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network System Logs System Logs Settings System Remote Logs Settings View System Logs Enable User Logging C Enable Developer Logging O Archived Logging comment Copyright C 2003 2008 Epyai ologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 54 System Logs System Logs Settings page e The Mark all Logs button is used to set a line marker in the logs If you need to follow a certain piece of log push this button to set a starting mark in all logs and then perform the needed actions over the Quadro When the actions are done push this button again to set an ending mark in all logs This way you shall clearly see a piece of log between the staring and ending marks generated during the certain actions taken over the Quadro The Comment text field is used to insert some text information which will be displayed next to the marks inserted in the logs This comment may describe the problem captured in the following logs and may be useful for the Technical Support e The Download all Logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar archive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro The System Remote Logs Settings p
70. 0 values which can be set by the administrator for every line Playback Gain 0 E Please Note If gain control is configured incorrectly DTMF digits may not be recognized properly The gain control settings depend solely on the board location country and the phone type wai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved The Restore Default Gains button reloads the default values Fig 11 128 Gain Control page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 71 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide SIP Tunnel Settings Administrator s Menus The SIP Tunneling service is used to build a tunnel between Quardos and to use that tunnel for routing the SIP calls through the remote Quadros When this service is enabled slave Quadros should be registered on the master Quadro with the corresponding username password With the appropriate configuration done on the master Quadro the master device can use the slave Quadros for routing the SIP calls through them and accessing peers located behind the slave Quadro or recognized by it This enables the master Quadro to locate the slave even when the network settings like IP address SIP port and other settings are changed on the slave Quadro When the SIP Tunneling service is enabled virtual tunnels between the master and its slaves are created A possibility to use the created SIP tunnels will be automatically enabled in the Call Routing table Optionally a SIP tunnel can be mutually established on two Quadros al
71. 0 3BETA Release Users currently logged in admin from 192 168 85 35 expires 11 09 Internet connection status DHCP Client admin from 192 168 0 1 expires 11 25 Renew WAN IP Address Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 1 Quadro4Li Management By clicking on System Users Telephony Internet Uplink or Network the administrator may access the following settings in each respective category and perform actions specific to each category System Menu Telephony Menu Internet Uplink Menu Network Menu e System Configuration Wizard e Call Statistics e PPP PPTP Settings e DNS Settings e Internet Configuration Wizard e SIP Settings e VPN Configuration e DNS Server Settings e System Security Management e RTP Settings e Dynamic DNS Settings e DHCP Settings for the LAN e Status e NAT Traversal Settings e Firewall and NAT nioriaca e IP Routing Configuration e Line Settings e Filtering Rules e DHCP Settings for the VLAN e Configuration Management e ISDN Settings e IDS Log Nae e Events e Gain Control e Time Date Settings e SIP Tunnel Settings e Mail Settings e Call Routing Users Menu e SMS Settings e VoIP Carrier Wizard EAEn MANAJEMEN e Firmware Update e RADIUS Client Settings e Receptionist Management e Networking Tools e Voice Mail Recording s Extensions PORA eakat SNMP Settings e Dial Plan Settings e Authorized Phones Database fin menu tree only e Diagnostics e 3PCC Settings e Features e Key Syst
72. 11 39 Event Configuration Settings page The Edit Event Settings page offers the following input options Mam Syslem Users Telephony ibane iplik Application displays the application the event refers to Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been Edit Event Settings selected for the action assignment Name displays the name of the event Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been selected for the action El assignment a Description displays additional information about the event ele Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been cli adi selected for the action assignment ame Back Action offers radio buttons to choose one of the actions to notify the Quadro administrator when an event s takes place i f Fig Il 40 Edit Event Settings page The following actions can be available e Display Notification A notification link will be displayed on the bottom of all pages and a record is added into the Events table The notification is executed as a link Please Check you pending events The link leads to the System Events page This action also will take place if Flash LED or Send Mail has been selected even if not specifically selected e Flash LED The second LED yellow will blink every second and a notification will be displayed on the bottom of all pages For some events the LED will start flashing after a delay e Send Mail an e mail notification about the new event on th
73. 2 and 3 see below the warning Please check your pending events will appear at the bottom of all management pages The system events and the warning message are visible only for the administrator The warning link which leads directly to the System Events page will disappear from the management pages if the administrator has marked all new events as read Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Internet connection status static IP Please check your pending events Copyright C 2005 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 37 Event Warning on the Main Menu page 23 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Bam Syriam Users Teleplioig Irebestavest Uplink Heiwn k Cepy nQusdmzza Nat A SST paiya System Events Shan Eaa Erani Simnas Tumen Salomi Timid Mon Sep 20 15 51 59 3005 Delete Elo al a tend Aree CG 9 Select af byvsoee Sobeethiny status Timestamp ojofofaoja aja jaf O The System Events table is the list of new and read system events System events have corresponding coloring depending on the nature of the event success priority 1 color green low importance failure priority 2 color yellow critical failure priority 3 color red lo E E E la E E m i The table shows the Status of the event new or read as well as the name of the application the event refers to event description and the date when the event was received For
74. 213 Deprem My E 05 8 5005 E 214 215 216 or 217 2ww 2a 2b and 2c to match the E MET specified phone number in the case of 2 3 7 the dialed Deseripuon nom heme number may be 23 or 27 to match the specified phone Cam a number The 11 15 23 38 45 pattern means that the Capydati E 8 Barti Testitentos bid AN dahin sra dialed number may be 11 15 23 38 or 45 to match the Fig ll 141 Local AAA Table Add Entry page pattern e Authentication by Login this selection is used to set the authentication based on the username and password inserted by the user upon login The Username text field requires the authentication username Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect Username digits allowed only will appear The Password text field requires the authentication password Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect Password digits allowed only will appear The Expiration Date and Time drop down lists are used to set the date and time when the registration will expire The Expires in checkbox is used to enable the Expiration Date and Time feature The Description text field requires an optional description about the calling party Edit opens the Edit Entry page to modify the local AAA entry Delete removes the selected local AAA entry from the Local AAA Table Select all selects all records of the table Inverse selection inver
75. 77833600 sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec PCMU IP Line 1 77833611 sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec PCMU IP Line 4 77833614sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec IP Line 5 77833615sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec PCMU corresponding information will not be Upload Universal Extension Recordings included in this column If no username is defined the extension number will be Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved displayed instead Fig Il 67 Extensions Management page e Percentage of System Memory indicates the user space in percentages configured for each extension The actual available duration in minutes for the extension voice mails uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages is also displayed here The available minutes corresponding to the selected user space are dependent on the Voice Recording codec selected from the Voice Mail Recording Codec page For example for the same amount of marked out user space selection of the G726 voice recording codec will provide more space for voice mails and user defined voice greetings than the G711 codec selection e Call Relay indicates whether or not the Call Relay option is enabled on the extension e Codecs column lists the short information full information is seen in the tool tip about extension specific voice Codecs Extension codec s can be accessed and modified by clicking on the link of the corresp
76. Contato PPTP L2TP Configuration Please Note The first address specified in the L2TP Subnet will be assigned to the L2TP server others will be assigned to the clients The L2TP server subnet should be different from the PPTP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error message will appear Fig 11 172 L2TPServer Configuration page To Specify an IPSec Connection 1 Press the Add button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection Wizard will appear in the browser window 2 Selecta VPN Peer Type and assign a name to the IPSec Connection Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 3 Enter the remote side IP parameters check subnets gateways for the connection select the NAT traversal option if needed and the desired keying type Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 4 Ifthe Automatic Keying type has been selected enter the automatic keying parameters and select the PFS and IPSec compression options if needed If the Manual Keying type has been selected enter the encryption and authentication keys and SPl s 5 To specify an IPSec connection with these parameters press Finish Press Cancel to abort the operation To Manage an RSA key for the IPSec Connection 1 Press the RSA Key Management button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection RSA Key will appear in the browser window 2 Select the RSA key length and press Generate to generate a n
77. D checkbox has been previously enabled fill in the Inbound Caller Pattern into the corresponding text field Choose the needed value from the Inbound Call Type drop down list as well as the Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix values 18 Press the Next button 19 If IP has been selected on the previous step in the Inbound Call Type drop down list then Inbound Host should be inserted in the current page If ISDB has been selected in the Inbound Call Type drop down list then the ISDN port number should be selected here 20 If the Set Date Time Period s checkbox has been selected on the first page pressing Next will open the Date Time Rules page where route validity should be defined 21 Press the Finish button to establish a local route with the inserted settings AAA To create a local AAA entry Click on the Local AAA Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Local AAA Table page Choose the Authentication type Enter the Phone Number or the Username and Password depending on the selected Authentication type Use the Expiration Date and Time checkbox to enable the expiration timeout Select the Expiration Date and Time from the corresponding drop down lists Press Save to apply these settings e a ae de Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 79 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Allowed Characters and Wildcards The following is the set of characters and wildcards allowed i
78. DITIONS YOU MAY NOT USE THE HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE 1 License Epygi Technologies Ltd the Licensor hereby grants to you a non exclusive right to use the Quadro Operational Software program the documentation for the software and such revisions for the software and documentation as the Licensor may make available to you from time to time collectively the Licensed Materials You may use the Licensed Materials only in connection with your operation of your Quadro You may not use copy modify or transfer the Licensed Materials in whole or in part except as expressly provided for by this Agreement 2 Ownership By paying the purchase price for the Licensed Materials you are entitled to use the Licensed Materials according to the terms of this Agreement The Licensor however retains sole and exclusive title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials regardless of the form or media in or on which the original Licensed Materials and other copies may exist You acknowledge that the Licensed Materials are not your property and understand that any and all use and or the transfer of the Licensed Materials is subject to the terms of this Agreement 3 Term This license is effective until terminated This license will terminate if you fail to comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement or you transfer possession of the Licensed Materials to a third party in violation of this Agreement You agree that upon such termination you will re
79. Entry page for Paging Group Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the Paging Group service for the extensions included in the Paging Group table Attendant Extension Settings For Attendant extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings Attendant Scenario SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages The SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions described above The General Settings and Attendant Scenario pages are described below Min Stem Users THephorn mient Uplink Bawak Extensions Management Edit Entry 1 General Settings for attendant extension Gone sons General Settings 00 This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Aine Display Name is an optional parameter used to define the Auto Attendant s description Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is se
80. IP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when the dialed number is wrong e Network Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when system overload network failure or timeout expiration occurred e System Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases indicated in Network Failure and Other fail reasons e Other available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when authorization negotiation not supported or request rejected or other unknown errors occur e Any stands for all failure reasons mentioned in the Failover Reason s group The Custom Profile text field is present if the PBX Voicemail call type has been selected on the first page of the Call Routing Wizard This field requires the Voice Mail Profile name to activate the custom voice mail settings see Voice Mail Profiles on the extension when the corresponding routing rule will be used Please Note If an extension does not have a profile specified here or the specified profile name is incorrect the default Voice Mail Settings of the extension will be used The Transport Protocol for SIP messages manipulation radio buttons group is available for SIP or IP PSTN call types only and allows you to select the transport UDP or TCP to transmit the SIP messages through The SIP Privacy manipulation radio buttons group is only available for the SIP call type and allows you
81. Management Changing access rights for role extensions Grant Access Deny Access Select all Inverse Selection CGI Name CGI Description Access E statistics Call Statistics Granted O ripstatistics Call Statistics RTP Details Granted C faxstatistics Call Statistics FAX Details Granted O forwardadd Forwarding List Add Edit Entry Granted o huntadd Call Hunting Add Edit Entry Granted E sds Speed Calling Settings Granted E userpsw Changing Password for admin or extension Granted E usersettings Extension Account Settings Granted E vmail Extension Yoice Mailbox Granted Yms Extension Yoice Mail Settings Granted E wmorofies Extension Yoice Mail Profiles Denied C hold Basic Services Hold Music Settings Granted redial Basic Services General Settings Granted O Jing Basic Services Do Not Disturb Settings Granted E addressmanagement Extension Caller ID Based Services Table Granted O supservices Edit Extension Caller ID Based Services Granted On the Change Access Rights page Grant Access Deny E sroupist Extension Group List Granted Access functional buttons are used to grant or deny access to E groupiistadd Extension Group List Add Edit Member RER certain GUI page s for the selected user Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved When access to a certain GUI page is denied for a user the You are not authorized to
82. N IP configuration gateway availability is checked When acting as a client DHCP and PPP servers accessibilities are being verified The Start Network Diagnostics button is used to initiate network diagnostics i e to check the WAN link and IP configuration to verify gateway DNS primary and secondary if configured servers accessibilities The Download system logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar archive file Logs can be used by Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem occurred on your Quadro The Reboot this Device button is used to reboot the Quadro Please note that the session with the Quadro will be closed i e Quadro GUI should be newly opened and new login will be required afterwards The Start ISDN Diagnostics button is used to initiate ISDN BRI low level diagnostic With these tests the ISDN physical link is checked and the Frame Synchronization is verified The field below will display the diagnostics results and the connectivity conditions System should be reconfigured if problems occur during the diagnostics Cepysi System Diagnostics Start detecting WAN Protocol Start Network Diagnostics Download system logs Checking IP configuration DHCP Client is running Checking internet connectivity ICMP ping Gateway 192 168 73 5 Primary nameserver 192 168 73 10 Secondary nameserver 192 166 0 2 Checking name service connectivity DNS Primary nameserver
83. P Lines text field MOTE You mu rest ri fee phone before the new semings wall lake effect WARNINGS Aber deleting thia recaptionisl record call queue sesings of hie edenelons io which the nes are attached will be reped bo their default values Watched Extensions 18 20 15 17 The next page of the wizard is a Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Summary where the configured settings for the receptionist should be verified Additionally this TE ao gt e page contains a Reboot IP Phone now checkbox which should be selected if you wish to have your IP phone rebooted once the corresponding receptionist is created Reboot is needed for a proper functionality of the IP phone However if you wish to reboot the IP phone later leave this checkbox unselected Reboot IP phone new Fig 11 97 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Summary page Extensions Directory The Extensions Directory is a useful tool for callers to get direct access to the Quadro extensions by spelling the username with the help of the phone keypad The Extensions Directory can be accessed through Quadro s Auto Attendant Services and it has its own manipulation buttons to browse the directory The Extensions Directory Settings page allows you to make a list of names assigned to the extensions on the Quadro If the name spelled by the caller matches the one s listed in the Extensions Directory the corresponding extension user name s will be played to t
84. P address will replace the oldest one from the replace the oldest one from the list list Recurrent Functional Buttons In connection with the tables the following are the few buttons you will see Functional Button Description Add Allows adding a new record to the displayed table A new page will be displayed to enter any new settings Ed owe modifying the settings of the record selected by a checkbox Normally only one 1 record may be selected A new page will be displayed to enter the modified settings Deletes the selected entry s of a table A warning message will ask for confirmation before deleting an existing entry Select Al Selects all table entry s for example for further deletion Inverses opposites an existing selection of table entry s If no entries are selected clicking the button will select all records May be shown in the upper right corner of a page It displays the number of seconds remaining until the next refresh of the Refresh in page will occur It may be used to reload the page manually Most of the tables offer the option to sort the entries in ascending or descending order by clicking the headings of the columns A small arrow next to the column heading indicates the direction of sorting upward or downward The entries of the table can be selected by using the corresponding checkboxes in order to edit or delete them Inverse Selection Entering SIP Addresses Correctly Ca
85. P ports should be 100 ports or less according to the system s capabilities otherwise the corresponding warning appears RTP RTCP Port ranges cannot include the defined SIP UDP ports see SIP Settings otherwise an error message will appear Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 61 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Telephone Event Draft Support enables telephony events transmission according to the draft ietf avt rfc2833bis 04 The checkbox needs to be toggled if the SIP destination party phone or IVR has problems recognizing DIMFs generated by the Quadro Enable RTCP Support enables Real Time Control Protocol support and allows for the RTCP packets transmission RTCP protocol is used for monitoring the RTP streams and changing RTP characteristics depending on Network conditions EA OPA Man System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network e pyel RTP Settings Edit Entry The RTP Settings Edit Entry page offers a drop down list and a checkbox Packetization Interval contains possible values in milliseconds Cm to be configured for the selected codec The Enable Silence Suppression checkbox selection enables i i Fig 11 111 RTP Settings Edit Entry voice activity detection for the selected codec To Edit Codec Parameters 1 Select the codec from the Codecs Table that is to be edited 2 Press the Edit button on the RTP Settings page The Edit Entry page will appear in the browser window 3
86. PTION OR NON INFRINGEMENT THE ENTIRE RISK ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS REMAINS WITH YOU 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED MATERIALS EVEN IF THE LICENSOR OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES YOU AGREE THAT YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S ENTIRE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSED MATERIALS SHALL BE AS SET FORTH HEREIN AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR LOSS TO YOU EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE LICENSE MATERIALS The foregoing limitation exclusion and disclaimers apply to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 120 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement 9 10 11 12 13 14 Compliance With Laws You may not use the Licensed Materials for any illegal purpose or in any manner that violates applicable domestic or foreign law You are responsible
87. Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Global Phone Network in a Box yy to Manual IT Administrator s Guide for Sta Edition 1 Jan 2011 SW Release 5 2 25 and higher Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Table of Contents Manual see Installation Guide Step by step guide to install and configure Quadro basically Manual II Administrator s Guide ADOUL this Administrator s GUIA ici drid ri A 4 Quadro s Graphical Interface v ccosirant rd NSA EN EEEE D A E E a 5 Administrators Main Page ococcocccccccccccccccccnnnnnnncnnnn nn r rr rr 5 RoC EE UNIONS PPP Ao o nue emee mene teas Gu ccen cc un ac an cea uuu uuu cuuuuuun cua uuu uuu ga snesoeeseconmeosmeesmeesn eee 6 Recurrent PUMCHOMAlIDUNOINS tetecetetetetetetetedetedetecededetecedetetesetesetededededededtdecteedttetiucceccnecceacceauceeccaqcceauceacceaucacactqccasaqueoeseeesoten 6 Ei cig clr Address ea CONTEO aree o o nz zz 6 ela EEC E en hr tne oe ete ee ee ee T re eee eee er nr 7 RSE a RU ED ttt eee erected etic A PS OO EE RA 7 System Configuration Wizard 6c EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE DEED EE EEE EE EEE DEEDES EEE EEE ESSE EE EEE EEE EEE EES 7 las dgceSegile tigi Pcl re cr ee ee eee 9 SYSTEM Secun MaMa TE ar aaa 11 AE AP e OC RN 12 CenerallMo malo ssipasinasinssiosicacinslnsipsicsicino ci leerlo SA 13 NE rs dei ae ec eee o ee ee ee ee E ee 13 Mio A run rari A itd 15 a e EEE A AA AA A AAAA 17 A e a OO A 17 SIP Registration tm 100
88. Qut E mail addr ss dina eri com Radracl call ipe PEX Repeat every E min a Rediad address mica 10 lines Demo Veit Mail On Se d Pel Send new ice message nolibcaiona va SUS Mites umber 044115171 Repeat every 1 min 1 bres Send new voice message noticadons wia phone call Callie SIF e SiP Clipbcara 12902850 e0r9Lcom al 10 Repeat every 1 min 1 limes estore detaun Mohicsion lets ape Upload new Noticahon Message Cimedianonficaton ed Erre lt lt lt Less notification opaons Restore detaun greening fie Liptad mtw preci ie Comedaignestingwar Gewese sao Bax snm a Beng Teather Le Al gh eed a Fig 11 204 Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page Attention The e mail can only handle up to 3 minutes long voice mails If the voice mail is longer than 3 minutes it will be truncated and only the first 3 minutes of it will be sent to the indicated e mail address However in the e mail body the recipient will receive the information that the attached voice mail is truncated and the total length of the voice mail Please note that the voice mails longer than 3 minutes will not be removed from the voice mailbox once they are sent per e mail even if the Remove Voice Mail on send checkbox is selected This gives you a possibility to listen to the ending of the voice mail directly from your voice mailbox from the handset or by downloading it from the Web management Please Note This service will work onl
89. Restore System Default Incoming Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Incoming Blocking Message Outgoing Blocking Message Listen to Current Outgoing Blocking Message O Record a Universal Outgoing Blocking Message Restore System Default Outgoing Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Outgoing Blocking Message GO Administrator s Logout O Your Name Listen to Current Name recorded O Record a Universal Name Restore System Default Name Stop Recording or Playback Name Message Out of Office Message Listen to Current Out of Office Message O Record a Universal Out of Office Message Restore System Default Out of Office Message Stop Recording or Playback Out of Office Message 113 Quadro4Li Manual IlI Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page This welcome page may be helpful if administrators want to inform their extension users about individual data they need to use the extensions Such as phone numbers phone lines IP addresses and SIP numbers To get a word form that may be edited and sent by mail double click on the paperclip sidewise Welcome You are using a Quadro4Li IP PBX made by Epygi Technologies Ltd This product incorporates SIPVoice Digital Signal Processing technology to send crystal clear voice around the globe without associated fees for long distance But you will soon learn it
90. SP side which then sends them on to the Internet For PPTP and L2TP Connections two parties are required a Client and a Server The client is responsible for establishing the connection The server is waiting for clients it is not able to initiate the connection itself Attention L2TP tunnels have no data encryption mechanism The Host Name and a Password specify each side The client should know the server s name and password the Quadro server has no password and the server should set the client s host name and a password The client and server settings have to match on both sides for successful connection establishment Clients and Servers are identified by their hostnames which means that only one client can be connected to the server in the same network Servers also define the range of IP addresses that are assigned to the Server and Client hosts participating in a connection The PPTP L2TP Configuration link displays a page where a new PPTP and L2TP connection can be configured as well as PPTP and L2TP server settings can be adjusted The page consists of 3 sub pages The Connections page lists all existing connections are listed characterized by their Connection Name Type of the connection PPTP or L2TP the Client Server mode the State of the connection and the Remote Hostname IP the IP address or the hostname of the connection peer The state of the PPTP and L2TP Connections except for the Stopped state is establish
91. Server Settings Mail Exchange MX undefined No aliases defined DHCP Options Gateways 172 30 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Domain name servers 172 30 0 1 NBT name servers 0 0 0 0 NTP servers 172 30 0 1 Domain name epygi config loc Overload tftp server name 172 30 01 DHCP Server Statements Authoritative enabled Ping Check enabled Ping Timeout 1 sec VLAN Settings Undefined Extension Settings Parameter System Default Value Maximum mail message duration 5 min Ask password before granting local access to mail box disabled Ask password before granting remote access to mail box enabled Send welcome message disabled Play Voice Mail help enabled Automatically play messages enabled Send mails count information message disabled Send date time information message enabled Send beep at the end of message enabled Silent VM recording disabled Send new voice messages via e mail disabled Voice Mail Send notification with attachment Remove Voice Mail On Send disabled Fax Send notification with attachment Remove Fax On Send disabled IPSec PPTP and L2TP DHCP Advanced Settings Voice Mail Settings Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 118 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Send new voice message notifications via SMS disabled Send new voice message notifications via phone call disabled Voice M
92. Servers Extension Reg Name Server Registered Registration Time Network Status Memory Status Lines Status joo 210800 0900 Hardware Status SIP Registration Status IP Lines Registration S License Status 210979 210978 210929 210927 210926 sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes sip epygi loc Yes 01 Sep 2008 17 21 28 01 Sep 2008 17 21 28 01 Sep 2008 17 21 28 01 Sep 2008 17 21 27 01 Sep 2008 17 21 27 01 Sep 2008 17 21 27 2 5ep 2008 17 74 27 20912 sip epygi lac L Me 7 101 Sep 2008 17 21 23 210911 sip epygi loc ha Yes 01 Sep 2008 17 21 23 Detected connection type Full Cone NAT external IP 91 198 247 205 5065 o E The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices and SIP Tunnels to Master Devices tables list the SIP tunnels between local and the remote Quadros see SIP Tunnel Settings The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a master The SIP Tunnels to Master Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a slave Copyright C 2003 2008 Epy echnologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 23 SIP Registration Status page IP Lines Registration Status nam A beers ood ee pe MA ae Quadra Status IF Lines Registration Status ie a ie jie ie fee ei Le E Dees Prodi ici A iis The IP Line Reg
93. Successful Missed and Unsuccessful Outgoing statistics entries to be displayed in the corresponding Call Statistics tables If the record numbers exceed the numbers specified in these drop down lists the oldest record will be removed The Download All Call Statistics link is used to download whole displayed statistics in a file that can be viewed with a simple text editor This type of call statistics file is more easy to Copysi quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Call Statistics Statistics Settings going Calls Statistics Settings Automatically Download Z Enable Call Reporting Maximal Number Of Successful Call Records 100 7 Maximal Number Of Missed Call Records 100 7 Maximal Number Of Unsuccessful Call Records 100 7 Download All Call Statistics Download All Call Statistics CSV format read and can be aligned in a spreadsheet Download All Call Statistics old format The Download All Call Statistics old format link is used to download whole displayed statistics in an old formatted file This file can also be viewed with a simple text editor but contains more intricately aligned content Clear all Records Save Back Please check your pending events Copyright C 2003 2010 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved The Clear all Records button is used to clear all statistics Fig 11 104 Call Statistics Settings page records The Automatically Download page is u
94. T Enable Session Timer enables advanced mechanisms for memean connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The DNS server for SIP radio button group allows you to choose between regular DNS servers configured in the DNS Settings page and specific DNS servers for SIP traffic e Use default is used to apply regular DNS servers for SIP traffic e Specific is used to enable SIP specific DNS servers For this Cim A Ce selection both primary and secondary SIP DNS servers so ceils ect as ets at should be defined in the SIP DNS 1 and SIP DNS 2 text Fig ll 109 SIP Settings page fields At the least a primary DNS server should be inserted Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 60 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The SIP Timers radio button group is used to define the timeouts of the SIP messages retransmission e RFC 3261 will apply standard SIP timers described in the corresponding specification e High availability will apply SIP timers to shorten the call establishment registration confirmation and registration failure procedures This selection provides more firmness to the SIP connection but increases the network traffic on the Quadro e Custom allows manually defining the Registration Timeout Registration Failure Timeout Transaction Duration and Session refresh timeout SIP timers in seconds RTP Settings T
95. _ The Password text field requires the authentication password Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel Fig 11 133 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry page establishment The Master device IP text field requires the IP address of the master device The Master device port text field requires the SIP port number of the master device The Registration State field displays information whether the slave device is registered on the master or not The Registration Date Time field displays the time and the date of last registration on the master s device Call Routing The Call Routing service simplifies the calling procedure for Quadro users e different types of calls internal SIP PSTN or IP PSTN can be placed in the same way SIP registration is not needed for extensions to make routing calls The Call Routing page offers the following components When the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing checkbox is disabled for all incoming SIP calls Quadro will first search the incoming SIP address in the Extensions Management table If found the incoming SIP call will ring on the corresponding extension If not found Quadro will look for a matching routing rule in Call Routing table Man Stem Users Telephony fer reed Ue Metin kh When the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing checkbox is enabled for all inco
96. access this page warning message will be displayed Fig Il 63 Edit Roles page at User Rights Management Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 35 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Users Menu quadro Cep vel Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi Extensions Management quadro Receptionist Management Refresh in 596 seconds Quadro4Li Extensions Directory Authorized Phones Database o Extensions Management o Receptionist Management o Extensions Directory o Authorized Phones Database e Telephony Active Calls Call Start Time Call Duration Calling Phone Called Phone No items in list e Network e Install Checklist e Feature Codes e Logout Home Logout Boot loader 5 0 3 Release Firmware Version 5 0 4 Release Users currently logged in Internet connection status DHCP Client admin from 192 168 0 1 expires 02 18 Renew WAN IP Address Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 64 Telephone Users Menu in Dynamo Theme F Fig Il 65 Telephone Users Menu in Plain Theme Extensions Management The Extensions Management page is used to create a variety of extensions and auto attendants on the Quadro From this page by clicking on the user extension the Administrator can go to the extension settings pages Main System Users Telephony intermit Uplink Metwork When this page is accessed for the first time after the
97. ads to the Events page where the methods of notification for each system event can be configured FAX Statistics Main Syan Leese Talaplian marinet Lili Hetiidi FAX Statistics The FAX statistics page is accessed from the Call Statistics page by clicking on the FAX link in the Details column for the calls that contain T 38 FAX transmission The FAX statistics page provides information about received and transmitted packets lost bad and duplicated packets This statistics refers only to the T 38 FAX transmission The FAX statistics is not available for the FAX transmitted with other protocols Fig Il 108 FAX Statistics page SIP Settings The SIP Settings provide information on the SIP receive UDP and TCP ports and allows you to select DNS server configurations for SIP and the SIP timers scheme The UDP Port indicates the SIP UDP User Datagram Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used The SIP UDP port cannot be in the selected RTP RTCP port range for Wan System Users Telephony internet Uplink eter IP lines see RIP Settings otherwise the Mapped port for SIP shouldn t be in RTP port range error message appears The TCP Port indicates the SIP TCP Transmission Control Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used SIP Settings Please Note Quadro will not use TCP protocol as a transport for SIP messages if the TCP Port field is left empty sonei ia fies IN EC
98. age SIP Access is to allow or deny the SIP access to or from the particular SIP servers SIP hosts or a group of them The SIP Access filtering rule may prevent or allow incoming or outgoing SIP calls to or from specified SIP server s or host s When Blocked IP List is used traffic from specific hosts may be blocked no matter what services are opened in the other filters NO traffic will be allowed to the specified hosts The Blocked IP List service has a higher priority if the same host is also listed in the Allowed IP List table Allowed IP List allows trusted hosts to reach your network and vice versa It is an exception to other rules and only all services may be allowed for a single host Restricted IPSec Generally hosts in a VPN are allowed to have access to any service i e no traffic will be blocked They are treated as if they were part of the Quadro LAN However this service can be manually denied here The Filtering Rules page provides several links Each link opens its specific parameters on the same page Only Change Policy see chapter Firewall and NAT Manage user Defined Services see chapter Service Pool and Manage IP Pool Groups see chapter P Pool lead to separate pages The Filtering Rules page also includes the currently selected firewall security Policy level and its description The table displayed on the bottom of this page shows the filters selected above specified by their State enabled or disabled the se
99. age is used to adjust the system logging settings and contains the following components e The Enable Remote Logging checkbox is used to enable remote monitoring of Quadro s logs When this option is selected remote administrators may connect Quadro with Telnet protocol port number 645 and access the logs selected on this page This is done for remote Quadro s diagnostics and is mainly used by Epygi s Technical Support Office To make the Quadro s logs open for remote access appropriate Firewall level or Filtering Rules must be created e Checkboxes below on this page are used to select those log types that should be accessible remotely Select only those logs that you wish to have monitored remotely In the View System Logs page you may view the generated logs on the Quadro System logs are useful to determine any king of problems on the Quadro as well as to monitor the user s access and the usage of it On the left side of the page a list of main logs is displayed Clicking on the needed link will display the log on the right side of the page The text field on the left side is dedicated for support personnel only and is used to search a custom log not listed on this page To do so insert a required log name to the text field and press Show Custom Log functional button Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x a Pp Main Sysiem Usera 3 Comerences Tephi indienne Uplink Rehan e pr 8l System Logs Gwem Logs Spas Selem Remote
100. ages are listed Use the Download functional button to download and use Remove to delete the corresponding custom voice message Browse opens a file chooser window to browse for a custom voice message or for an archive file with the tar gz extension containing the custom attendant scenario and the voice prompt recordings Fig 11 87 Upload Custom Voice Messages page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 47 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Edit functional button provides a possibility of editing multiple Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network extensions at the same time In this case fields that cannot be edited for multiple records have Multiple values in the Edit Entry AN page When editing user and attendant extensions together the Edit Entry page displays only those fields that are for both user extension and attendant settings Additionally for the fields that need to be modified a Select to modify fields checkbox alongside the corresponding field needs to be selected to submit changes otherwise the fields will not be updated General Settings 11 21 22 Delete removes the selected extensions lf no records are selected an error message occurs Deleting an extension from the Extensions Table will automatically remove the name attached to the deleted extension in Extensions Directory The Upload Universal Extension Recordings link leads to the page whe
101. ail Indication Lamp indication Zero Out enabled to 00 default Attendant FAX Redirection disabled Out of Office disabled Greeting message default Profiles for Voice Mail Settings no entries Display Name undefined Account Settings Caller ID Based Services Basic Services General Basic Services Hold Music Basic Services Do Not Disturb Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x User Password Protection disabled both for incoming and outgoing calls User s Name for Extensions Directory default Custom Voice Messages default No entries in the table For Any Callers all services disabled Intercom Activate If Requested Blocking Voice Messages default No answer timeout 20 sec Call Waiting Service enabled Autoredial Interval 10 sec Autoredial Period 15 min Send Hold Music to remote party disabled Hold Music Own Music Music file default Disabled Timeout 30 min Send message to Caller Party enabled 119 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement Appendix Software License Agreement EPYGI TECHNOLOGIES LTD Software License Agreement THIS IS A CONTRACT CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT USE OF THE QUADRO HARDWARE AND OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE PROGRAM INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CON
102. ame with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quadro however this is not mandatory The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel_ The Password text field requires the authentication password Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel establishment The Symmetric NAT checkbox should be selected when the slave Quadro is located behind the symmetrical NAT The Enable Tunnels to Master Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a slave device and allows connecting to the master Quadro via SIP tunnel When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Master Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Master Devices moves you to the page where a list of master devices needs to be defined Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Main Byte Users Lelep lorry fered Ud Hetwo R SIF Tunnel Settings F Enabde Tunneli to Skr Dra ar Tunrsete bo Sge rar Freie Tunneli to Monten Devices T rowel ia k j ES a Fig Il 129 SIP Tunnel Settings page Man System Users Tedephony ASA Metwotk SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Fig 11 130 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices page Mam System Users Telephony Aerel Upirh Metwotk SIP Tunnel Set
103. apped Host text fields require the Mapped Host for RTP traffic over NAT e Mapped RTP RTCP Port Range Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed Please Note RIP RTCP Mapped Port ranges should be greater than or equal to the RTP RTCP port ranges defined on the RTP Settings page The STUN Parameters page enables automatic NAT configuration through the STUN server and is used to configure the STUN Simple Traversal of UDP over NAT client on the Quadro This page requires the following data to be inserted The STUN Server text field requires the STUN servers hostname or IP address The STUN Port text field requires the STUN server port number The Secondary STUN Server and Secondary STUN Port text fields respectively require the parameters of the secondary STUN server The Polling Interval drop down list contains the possible time intervals between referrals to the STUN server The Keep alive interval text field provides the options to select the time interval in seconds for keeping NAT mapping alive The value should be in the range of 10 to 300 seconds The NAT IP checking interval text field indicates the interval in seconds between the NAT IP checking attempts used to distinguish the possible NAT IP address changes and to perform registratio
104. at will be paged They will automatically go off hook when the paging call comes in The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are explicitly allowed forbidden to activate the call paging using the corresponding extension When calling to the Paging Group extension the call will be forwarded to the extensions listed in the Paging Group table The phones of the called extensions will automatically go off hook the phone speaker automatically becomes activated and the caller will be able to make his announcement Since the paging call opens one way communication the called extensions will not be able to give an answer to the caller To terminate the paging call caller should simply hang up Attention Call paging will not work if the called extension is in call When caller not listed in the Access List calls the Paging Group extension password authorization using the password of the Paging Group extension will be required to start the call paging When a denied user tries to call the Paging Group extension Party does not accept your call message will be played to the caller When caller dials the Paging Group extension with empty Paging Group table Number dialed temporarily unavailable message will be played to the caller For Paging Group extensions Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages
105. be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear The Add Members page provides the following radio buttons IPaddress requires the member IP address that is to be added to the group IP Subnet requires the subnet specified by the IP address and the Maskbits See above for more information about Maskbits URL Address requires the member hostname to be added to the group The User defined Group includes previously added groups that may also be added as a member to another group Member description text fields can be used to enter an optional description of the member Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Main System Users Telepireary imane Lili Netwath IP Pool Configuration Fig 11 180 IP Pool Configuration page Main System Users Telepieary imene Lipid Network IP Pool Configuration Add Group Chatinup member cl my Ee dan fo Back Fig 11 181 IP Pool configuration Add Group page Main System Users Telepieery imane Up nh Network IP Pool Group Configuration Current Group ChatGroup M Elf Delete Selechill ire Selection Meud de Fig 11 182 IP Pool Group Configuration page Main System Users Telephony ln Up nk Network IF Pool Group Configuration Add Member Current Group ChatGroup Diana meniher sae Back Hap Fig 11 183 IP Pool Group Configuration Add Member 103 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide To Add a
106. below e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Settings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Settings e DNS Settings The Switch to Auto Provisioning link moves you to the Automatic Provisioning page where Quadro can be configured automatically The Uplink Configuration page allows you to select the Quadro s WAN interface connection type and its bandwidth settings These settings will make Quadro available to the external network Man System Users Telephony tere Upaink Network Depending on the Uplink Interface Protocol selection the page Internet Configuration Wizard following the Uplink Configuration page is different Thus if PPPoE is selected the next page will be PPP Configuration while Uplink Configuration selecting Ethernet will bring up the WAN IP Configuration page The Uplink Configuration page offers the following components The WAN Interface Protocol radio buttons are used to choose the protocol depending on the requirements of the ISP Internet Service Provider PPPoE turns on the PPP over an Ethernet connection PPTP turns on the Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP interface used for the connection between Quadro and ADSL reus cae vee modem A fixed IP address configuration is needed in this case Fig Il 8 Internet Configuration Wizard Uplink Configuration page Ethernet turns on the Ethernet connection The WAN Interface Bandwidth settings allow t
107. ce checkbox selection enables Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR service which displays the incoming caller ID only if Presentation Indication is allowed on the remote side Otherwise if CLIR service is disabled caller ID will be unconditionally displayed When the Alternative Disconnection Mode checkbox is not selected Quadro will disconnect the call as soon as the disconnect message has been received from the peer When the checkbox is selected Quadro s user may hear a busy tone when peer has been disconnected The Override CLID with P Asserted Identity checkbox selection enables SIP P Asserted Identity support For the calls from SIP to ISDN if Invite SIP message contains a P Asserted Identity then the CallerlD on ISDN is sent with the value from the P Asserted Identity field otherwise the CallerlD on ISDN is sent with the value from the From field For the calls from ISDN to SIP if the incoming CallerlD from the ISDN network contains a restricted flag then the P Asserted Identity field in the Invite SIP message contains the restricted CallerlD and the From field contains anonymous The B1 Channel and B2 Channel checkboxes enables disables timeslots for voice transfer Disabling the timeslot will prevent both incoming and outgoing calls Clicking on the ISDN Stats link will open the ISDN Status page that displays ISDN traffic statistics on the corresponding ISDN trunk The ISDN Stats link is displayed for every active trun
108. ced configuration only and contains L2 amp L3 Settings This page only appears when the Advanced Settings checkbox is selected on the previous page of the wizard This page contains the following components ISDN L2 Timers e Excessive Ack Delay T200 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 500 to 9999 between the transmitted signaling packet and its acknowledgement received e Idle Timer T203 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 99999 for the ISDN client idle timeout ISDN L3 Timers e The T302 Timer text field requires the value for the T302 A Corsi timer in milliseconds digit values from O to 15000 It ISDN Wizard indicates that the time frame system is waiting for a digit to be dialed When the timer expires it initiates the call sc eee e T309 Timer requires the value for the T309 timer in ae milliseconds numeric values from O to 90000 It is Gens Ac Doiy T200 007 200 0000 lht responsible for call steadiness during link disconnection 70008 1000 9890 mest enana Retecton within the period equal to this timer value If the value in 13002 Tires anni 0 15000 y rite Desrer Delablighmernd Procedure en progress indrenten wth band nfomabien this field is zero 0 the T309 timer will be disabled 130 Tine 0 SUDO 4 rise Called Party Type of Hurnbar Linkin 1340 Tirer 12000 150000 y mer Calla Party Tepe of Numbi Linknirar te e T310 Timer requires the value for the T310
109. cess Code Gv Pre Cd eee Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi ogies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 6 System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Codes Settings page Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Internet Configuration Wizard The Internet Configuration Wizard allows the administrator to configure the WAN interface settings and to adjust Quadro s connectivity with an external network The Internet Configuration Wizard MUST be run for Quadro to be connected to the Internet Man Syam Users Telephony hedterivet Uplink LACT 0 Vel Internet Configuration Wizard Gatting Started l for Protocols PPPoE and PPPoA I for Protocol PPTP a PF 1 t FRPP All the settings of the Internet Configuration Wizard are described in the chapters below except those for the IP settings which will be described in this chapter Please Note It is strongly recommended not to change the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to an administrator Fig Il 7 Internet Configuration Wizard Start page The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings e Uplink configuration see below For WAN Interface protocol PPPoE For WAN Interface protocol PPTP For WAN Interface protocol Ethernet e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN IP Configuration see below e WAN IP Configuration e WAN Interface Configuration see
110. checkbox should be enabled if the remote party does not e recognize hold requests initiated from the Quadro H staddmas Sig Er bari Por 5060 Ouitbomnd Proxy tor Secondary SIP Jered A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively as mananan require the host address IP address or the host name and the n port numbers of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server see La These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and m are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers Capyrighat ty 2000 R Ey Teh r H ti i ini Fig Il 71 Extensions Management Edit Entry Advanced SIP Settings page 4 Remote Settings This group is used to configure SIP Remote Extension functionality This is an advanced telephony feature that allows Quadro users to remotely operate Quadro Users need to register a hardware or software SIP phone on the Quadro by defining the Quadro s global IP address and an appropriate Username Password A registered SIP Remote phone can act fully as a phone connected locally to Quadro i e it can use Quadro s PBX features place and receive calls access voice mails etc The Enable checkbox activates the SIP Remote Extension s functionality Please Note SIP Remote Extension functionality may be enabled only for active attached to IP line extensions Identification parameters used by the remote SIP device for registration on t
111. connection ID compression option in Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression with this option PPPD will not compress the connection ID byte from Van Jacobson and will not ask the peer to do so Disable the IPXCP and IPX protocols this option should only be selected if the peer is not working properly and cannot handle requests from PPPD for IPXCP negotiation Fig 11 159 Advanced PPP Settings page VPN Configuration A VPN Virtual Private Network is established to connect two local networks intranets securely over the Internet securely The VPN routers manage authentication between servers and clients and handle data encryption for the connection Only authorized users may access the network and the data exchange cannot be intercepted VPN connections are in many ways like every Internet connection they are based on IP addresses which means the concerned VPN gateways must authenticate the IP addresses of their respective partner s VPN gateways Each time a specific VPN is to be established usually the same IP addresses are expected This will not create problems if both VPN partners have fixed WAN IP addresses There may be circumstances reasons to prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses To enable devices that use a variable IP address as part of a VPN they are turned into Road Warriors For example at this point they are able to reach their corporate network via authentication at the company s VPN gateway device This
112. ction enables the firewall security service The firewall security level has to be selected otherwise the firewall cannot be enabled Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 99 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Firewall Security radio buttons are the following Man System Users Telephony Aerel Up Metwoth e Low Security Everything that is not explicitly forbidden will be allowed This security level doesn t block anything Firewall Configuration by default It is recommended if the device is already located behind another firewall or if every filter has been configured correctly e Medium Security Traffic originating from the LAN side may pass and traffic from the WAN side will be blocked by default This is the recommended security level e High Security Everything that is not explicitly allowed will be blocked including traffic from the LAN side The Advanced Firewall Settings link refers to the page where Quadro s privacy can be configured The View Filter Rules link opens the Filtering Rules page Fig 11 174 Firewall and NAT Settings page Advanced Firewall Settings Advanced Firewall Settings are used to deny Ping and Portscanning operations addressed towards the device With these features enabled Quadro will answer with inscrutable messages to the Ping and Portscanning operations Please Note Operations are available only when the firewall is enabled from the Man System User
113. d in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram charts that are to be built Transfer Statistics Time range of statistic table Intraday hd Interface the drop down list offer the values Interface LAN WAN Wide Area Network WAN events only Y Show also as readable values LAN Local Area Network LAN events only Receive values Transmit values Received Bytes Y Transmitted Bytes When Show also as readable values checkbox is selected Y Received Packets Y Transmitted Packets an additional table with statistics values will be displayed on Receive Errors M Transmit Errors the next page Receive Drop Errors Ml Transmit Drop Errors The area Receive Values provides the following Receive Bytes number of received bytes Receive Packets number of received Ethernet packets Receive Errors number of received packets containing errors ygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Receive Drop Errors number of received packets that have been discarded Receive Overrun Errors number of received overrun errors that occur when the receive buffer is not large enough to hold all incoming packets This error usually appears due to a slow receiving system Receive MultiCast Packets number of received broadcast packets Receive Frame Errors Y Transmit Collisions Received Multicast Packets Y Transmit Carrier Errors Fig 11 15 Transfer Statistics page ra ETE 4 Man System Users T
114. d from the Local AAA Table and gives the option to enable disable authentication of each user for a particular route Since the Call Routing Table may have multiple entries that could match to same pattern the table will be internally rearranged according to the rules with the following consequences e The pattern matching best to the e Best Matching Algorithm will have the higher position in the rearranged list e f multiple patterns equally match to the e Best Matching Algorithm the pattern with the lower metric will get the higher position in the rearranged list e lfthe multiple patterns with the same metric have been matched to the e Best Matching Algorithm the pattern in the higher position in the table will get the higher position in the rearranged list The pattern in the highest position of the rearranged list will be considered as the preferred one The second and subsequent matching patterns will be used if the destination refused the call due to the configured Fail Reason The Enable Disable functional buttons are used to enable disable the selected route s Disabled routes will have no effect Enabled routes will be parsed when initiating routing calls The State column in the Call Routing Table displays the current state of the routes enabled disabled Add starts the Call Routing Wizard where a new routing pattern may be defined The Call Routing Wizard is divided into several pages Page 1 displays the following components
115. de you will see a variety of recurrent buttons Below is a description of these buttons This button leads back to the previous Previous page of a fixed sequence of pages used mainly in wizards This button returns you to the page you were previously on This button leads forward to the next page of a fixed sequence of pages used mainly in wizards Cancel This button discards the latest not yet This button confirms an operation you chose confirmed entries before This is the last button of a fixed sequence oi pages hai complieis and caves ihe i eat discards an operation you chose This button confirms an operation you started before entries of an entire sequence This button opens the help page belonging to the currently active Quadro management page This button saves the settings modified on the currently active management page This button opens a window where the last This button opens a window where the last inserted IP addresses are listed lt allows inserted SIP addresses are listed It allows the the user to make a quick selection of an IP user to make a quick selection of an IP address address that has been previously used Ps that has been previously used This will avoid IP Clipboard This will avoid the user needing type it SIP Clipboard the user needing type it again The clipboard again The clipboard can hold up to 10 IP can hold up to 10 SIP addresses and a new addresses and a new IP address will SI
116. ded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new welcome message file The Download Welcome Message and Remove Welcome Message links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Welcome Message link is used to download the message file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Welcome Message link is used to restore the default welcome message Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 46 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Recurring Attendant Prompt this group allows updating the active recurring Auto Attendant message played after the Attendant Welcome Message and then periodically repeated while being in the Auto Attendant downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Upload new Recurring Attendant Prompt indicates the file name used to upload a new recurring auto attendant prompt The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid au
117. ding extension The Failover to PSTN checkbox selection will route the call to the PSTN through local ISDN lines in case the VoIP Carrier is not available When this checkbox is selected an additional entry will be added to the Call Routing table This maintains digit transmission to the local PSTN when an IP call towards the configured VoIP Carrier cannot be established Please Note A warning message will appear when the defined Access Code already exists in the Call Routing table i Prious or causes a conflict with entries already in the Call Routing table In this case when continuing through the VolP Carrier E e Wizard the existing entry in the Call Routing table will Fig 11 144 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 3 automatically be overwritten by the new settings Min Byte User Telephony Meer eet Up Hebron VoIP Carrier Wizard WolP Carrier Access Code Quadro4Li SW Version RBA Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus RADIUS Client Settings RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service specifies the RADIUS protocol used for authentication authorization and accounting to differentiate to secure and to account for the users The RADIUS Server provides the option for a caller from through Quadro to pass authentication and to be able to dial a specific number When a RADIUS client is enabled on the Quadro and according to the configuration of AAA Required option see Call Routing table
118. dio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new Recurring Attendant Prompt file The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt and Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt link is used to download the Recurring Attendant Prompt file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt link is used to restore the default Recurring Attendant Prompt The Attendant Ringing Announcement group allows uploading an optional voice message that is played to callers instead of ring back tones when making calls through an auto attendant The Ringing Announcement can be enabled for both custom and default attendants Please note The Attendant Ringing Announcement is played to SIP to extension and PSTN to extension calls only The announcement can also be played to SIP attendant SIP and PSTN attendant SIP calls if they are made by a call routing rule for which the RTP proxy is enabled The group offers the following components The Enable Ringing Announcement checkbox enables disables the Auto Attendant optional announcement message When this ch
119. dress or the host name of the remote server The Server Port requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the backup files in The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FTP In case of FTP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Backup Interval Selection drop down lists are used to select the frequency and the time when the automatic backup of the Quadro s system configuration and the voice data will take place Backup Now button is used to perform a manually immediate backup of the system configuration and the voice data The Backup amp Download all config amp voice data link generates a backup file with all configuration settings and user uploaded greeting messages It opens a file chooser window for immediate download to the users PC The Upload amp Restore all config amp voice data link opens a page that has a Browse button which opens a file chooser to select a backed up file and a Configuration to Upload field requiring the file path to upload and to restore it immediately Pressing Save will restore the selected backup file and delete all current user defined greetings and replace configuration settings The Restore Default Configuration functional button resets all configuration settings and restores the
120. e Quadro will be sent to the e mail address specified in the Mail Settings page e Send SNMP Trap an SNMP notification will be sent to the traphost s listed in the SNMP Trap Settings table see SNMP Settings Send SMS an SMS notification about the new event on the Quadro will be sent to the mobile phone specified in the SMS Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 25 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Actions that are not allowed for the selected event like mail notification if the PPP link is down or the mail server has been configured improperly are hidden For multiple events editing actions that are not appropriate for least one of the selected events will also be hidden Please Note In case of an IDS Intrusion Detection System intrusion alert only the first possible intrusion in each 10 minute period will initiate an event This helps to avoid flooding the System Events table and flooding the user with various intrusion alerts that result from each possible Denial of Service attack When these events are displayed in the System Events table the user can receive detailed information about the intrusions through a link to the IDS log list If Quadro cannot receive an IP address from the DHCP or PPP servers or cannot register an extension on the SIP or Routing servers or cannot reach an NIP server it raises only one event for the entire period the action has failed but will cont
121. e codec and then move it to the top The Out of Band DTMF Transport checkbox enables DTMF code transmission in parallel with the voice stream The destination receiving the DTMF code will play it locally if it supports the feature This is helpful to avoid DIMF s loss upon bad traffic This feature is valuable for all codecs but it is especially recommended to enable it in case low bit rate codecs G 729 G 726 16 etc are selected Enable T 38 FAX checkbox enables the FAX tone detection and the T 38 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the T 38 codec support for incoming unified FAX messages The Enable Pass Through FAX checkbox enables the FAX tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the G 711 codec support for incoming unified FAX messages If both of the above checkboxes are enabled the T 38 codec will be used as a preferred codec for FAX transmission If it is not supported by the peer the G 711 codec will be used instead If the extension is attached to the line that has no FAX machine modem connected the extension is virtual or is attached to an IP line the incoming FAX can only be stored in the extension s voice mailbox To allow FAX to be stored in the voice mailbox the extension s user should not answer the incoming calls so that they are forwarded to the voice mailbox P
122. e handled by the external Policy Server With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc The Percentage of Total Memory drop down list allows you to select the space for the extension s voice mails and uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro When editing an existing extension and decreasing the voice mailbox size the system will check the present amount of voice mails in the mailbox of the extension lf the memory required for these voice mails exceeds the size entered the system will suggest either to remove all voice messages from the extension s voice mailbox or to select a larger size so that the existing voice messages can be stored in the mailbox The Enable Ringing Simulation checkbox is available on virtual extensions only and enables extra ring tones played to the caller before the voice mail of the called virtual extension ge
123. e number of all outgoing calls in the selected trunk Incoming Calls shows the number of all incoming calls in the selected trunk ISDN trunk statistics are not displayed on this page at first but the page is automatically refreshed every 10 minutes Statistics collected from that time as well as the last resetting of the counter will be displayed there System Uptime Current System Time and Last Time Cleared last time ISDN statistics has been cleared are displayed at the bottom of the page To reset the statistics counters press the Clear button Gain Control Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep 81 04Li109 Gain Control Restore Default Gains The Gain Control settings are used to define transmit and receive gains ISDN 1 ISDN 2 0 For ISDN trunks Transmit Gain defines the level of voice A o Transmit Gain 0 transmitted by Quadro to the PSTN network and Receive Gain A ee defines the volume of voice received by Quadro from the PSTN Receive Gain 6 Y oe network or ISDN 4 0 For Voice Mail the Recording Gain defines the volume of the Transmit Gain 0 E Transmit Gain 0 phone microphone upon playing voice mails or system messages 7 cece E and the Playback Gain defines the phone speaker volume upon Receive Gain 6 MH playing voice mails or system messages The Gain Control page consists of the Transmit Gain and Receive di Gain drop down lists for each line They contain the allowed gain Recording Gain
124. e of Key System Emulation services is limited to the IP phones attached to the Quadro through the available IP lines and provides direct connection to the available PSTN lines and SIP networks In its turn the IP phones are limited to the following models with the perspective to enlarge the list of recommended IP phones in the future e Aastra 480i e Snom 320 e Aastra 9133i e Snom 360 e Aastra 55i e Snom 370 e Aastra 57i Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 86 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Key System Emulation feature allows to e Have a direct connection to the available PSTN lines and SIP networks behind the Quadro by pushing the programmable keys on the IP phone e Monitor the availability and status of all configured external lines via programmable keys on the IP Phones e Place the call on hold from one IP phone and pick it from another IP phone attached on the Quadro How Key System Emulation works Depending on the model the IP phone has a number of programmable keys available Basically all programmable keys should have an LED which can be switched ON OFF or blinking If an IP phone has a display the programmable keys may also have an additional description like what the particular programmable key does or just a name displayed on it On the Quadro Shared Line Appearance SLA lines act as an intermediate link between the external PSTN lines or SIP servers on one end and the programmable k
125. eckbox is selected but no custom announcement message is uploaded the default message will be played to callers Upload new Attendant Ringing Announcement indicates the file name used to upload an announcement The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new announcement The Download Ringing Announcement and Remove Ringing Announcement links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Ringing Announcement link is used to download the announcement file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Ringing Announcement link is used to restore the default ring back tones Friendly Phones the Edit Authorized Phones Database link refers to the Authorized Phones Database page where a list of trusted external phones can be created If external SIP or PSTN users are added to the Quadro Authorized Phones database they are free to access the Auto Attendant Services without passing the authentication or to use the Call Back services The Custom manipulation radio button selecti
126. ect the timeout in seconds between two attempts to register Encoding Type allows you to select the encoding type PAP or CHAP that should be unique on both the client and the server sides for the establishment of a successful connection Encoding type should also be requested from the Radius Server administrator The Authorization Port text field requires the port number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the authentication requests The Accounting Port text field requires the port number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the accounting messages Fig 11 145 Radius Client Settings page 2 Authentication Settings The Enable common login for all users in time of by Phone authentication checkbox enables custom settings for the callers who passed an authorization by phone on the Quadro This checkbox enables Username and Password text fields to insert the custom settings that will stand instead of the source caller s settings when being delivered to the RADIUS server The Authentication on Destination RADIUS Server parameters group is used to insert a Username and a Password followed by the password confirmation to pass authentication on the RADIUS Server of the destination Quadro If these fields are left empty the original authentication settings that users enter for authentication will be used 3 Accounting Settings The Username field is dedicated for accounting services only It is used to insert an ide
127. ected on the previous page is PPTP They are used to select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables the Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Telephony bier met Uplne Network PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Add PPTP L2TP Connection Fig 11 168 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard PPTP Connection Properties PP TPConnection Fig 11 169 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard for PPTP connection Page 2 VO Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network O py gl Guero PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard L2TP Connection Properties L2TPConnection Fig 11 170 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard for L2TP connection Page 2 The Start functional button initiates the selected connection s If it is a client connection then this button initiates a client activity of reaching the server The Start option is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time The Stop functional button is used to stop the selected connection s Stopping the server connection will disconnect all connected clients and close the PPTP L2TP tunnel The Stop option is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 97 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Adm
128. ection and are optional for Shared Secret selection However it is recommended to define Ss aa the Local ID and Remote ID values for multiple road Fig 11 164 IPSec Connection Wizard Automatic Keying Settings page warrior connections Previous Finis PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy is a procedure of system key exchange which uses a long term key and generates short term keys as is required Thus an attacker who acquires the long term key can neither read previous messages that they may have captured nor read future ones Use IPSec Compression enables IPSec data compression This option is displayed only if the IPSec VPN partner supports it The Manual Keying page offers the following components Depending on the selected encryption and ee See ee Hone Cepysi authentication services of the prior page IPSec Connection Properties you will get some of the IPSec Connection Wizard following text fields Manual keying toQuadro99 DES Encryption Key e 3DES Encryption Key pa E e SHA1 Authentication Key prisas arriddr eS001152 bTelddar Sab54e40 e MD5 Authentication Key ERN ii Buhr i 101 Manual keys must be entered in the hexadecimal format otherwise the error message Incorrect Encryption Key will appear 103 103 The SPls Security Parameter Index are indices to keep the IPSec Connection tunnels distinct A security association SA is defined by destination protocol and SPI Without the SPI
129. ed Settings Fig 11 122 ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings page of ISDN Wizard e PTMP Point to Multi Point In case of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices connected to the same ISDN trunk from CO except the Quadro In case of connection to PBX Network interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices connected to the same ISDN trunk from Quadro except for the PBX In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to automatic mode ISDN Settings Please Note Consult with your CO operator or network administrator before configuring the ISDN connection type The ISDN Wizard Page 2 content is dependent on the connection type selected on the previous page of ISDN Wizard Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 67 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Telephony ISDN Wizard ISDN PTMP Settings Trunk 1 The next page is ISDN Wizard MSN Settings page which is used to turn on the MSN configuration It is recommended to enable the MSN when there are multiple ISDN devices as connected to the same ISDN bus If the MSN is enabled on this Fig 11 123 ISDN Wizard ISDN PRMP Settings page the next page will require the MSN table configuration For MSN service enabled the Routing Settings page is used to assign MSN numbers to the certain destinations on the Quadro
130. ed as ForPSTN and its name should be Mobile number Expiration Date and Time defined in the routing rule responsible for incoming PSTN Expires in calls distribution In parallel to this voice mail profile there can Noor o be another profile designed for internal PBX calls It will play the following voice mail greeting Hi you have reached Mike s voice mailbox please drop me a message and shall call you back the maximum voice mail duration is 5 minutes and there is a Zero Out feature configured to call Mike s cellular phone This voice mail profile can be saved as ForPBX and its name should be defined in the routing rule Fig Il 201 Voice Mail Settings for the Administrator responsible for PBX calls distribution to the local extensions JRestore default greeting file When the first routing rule is used and the call reaches the extension that has the corresponding voice mail profile the settings of the ForPSTN voice mail profile will be activated For the second routing rule when the call reaches Mike s voice mailbox the settings of the ForPBX voice mail profile will be activated The same profile name can be used to create profiles for different extensions This is useful if the profiles have a similar purpose but differ in certain user specific settings such as voice mail greeting Zero Out destination number new voice mail notification options and so on Creating multiple profiles with the same name gives a wide flexibili
131. ed as a link that refers to the page where logout information about the connection status is displayed Logs can be useful to determine problems on PPTP or L2TP connections failure Connections Es Stat Sop Add Cdn Delete Select all krapi Selection Add functional button leads to the PPTP L2TP Connection Caer ta Ba ie Wizard page where a new connection can be established A Main Seticin Users belephony inet re Up PPTP L2TP Configuration Please note After creating a PPTP server connection PPTP connections between devices placed on the Quadro LAN and external devices will no longer be possible The PP TP pass through service for incoming and outgoing traffic will be automatically disallowed once a PPIP server connection is created Fig 11 167 PPTP L2TP Configuration page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 96 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard consists of several pages and allows you to create a new PPTP or L2TP connection The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 consists of the following components Connection Name text field requires a connection identification name The name of the connection cannot start with a digit symbol however it can contain digits further in the name Connection Type drop down list allows to select the type of the connection PPTP or L2TP The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 2 consists of the following components The Peer Name text field
132. ed extension i e the extension number and its password will be automatically submitted by the Quadro system The trusted user will directly access the Quadro Auto Attendant services The SIP settings of the login extension will be used when making IP calls The Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox enables direct access for the trusted user to the Quadro Auto Attendant Call Relay menu If the checkbox is not selected a trusted caller will be directed to the Auto Attendant s main menu but will still be able to reach Remote Access Voice Mailbox of the specified extension and Call Relay services see Feature Codes with no authentication Please Note Login Extension drop down list and Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox have no sense for Auto Attendant with custom scenario configured see Attendant Extension Settings The Description text field allows entering an optional comment Callback Settings The Enable Callback checkbox selection gives the possibility for a specified trusted caller to use the Instant Call Back service see chapter Call Back Services The Callback Call Type drop down list includes possible callback call types PBX PSTN SIP and Auto The Callback Destination text field requires the destination number where Quadro should instantly call back to The value inserted in this field is dependent on the selected callback call type for PBX 2 digit extension is required for SIP the SIP address is requires and
133. ed if several DHCP CS WSS servers are used on the network and the Quadro should i provide network parameters to IP phones only o Doman nami enyg contigoc eo C Overload tftp server name 172 30 0 1 e The Ping Check checkbox enables checking the availability of an IP address on the network before providing it to a client If this checkbox is selected the Quadro will first ping an IP address retrieved from the IP M authoritative pool and wait for a reply If no a reply is received within a MI Ping Check timeout specified in the Ping timeout text field by default 1 sec the retrieved IP address will be provided to the client If otherwise a new IP address will be retrieved from the IP pool and the procedure will be repeated If this checkbox is not selected the Quadro will provide an IP address immediately when requested DHCP Server Statements Ping Timeoutfsec 1 Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 194 DHCP Advanced Settings The following functional buttons are available Add opens a page Add Entry page where a new DHCP server option can be defined The Add Entry page contains a group of manipulation radio buttons to select between the predefined DHCP server options or to define your own DHCP server option Main Synem Cone ace Management mama Uik Nein k e Predefined this selection allows you to select from the predefined DHCP server options DHCP Advanced Settings
134. ed in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the routing pattern instead of the discarded digits The E Grabio Roconi ana following tags can be used for this field Disabler Key Pattern e lt callerid range gt used to apply the complete or a part of ira caller ID the caller s number detected during the call as a prefix For example lt callerid 1 3 gt indicates that the first 3 digits of the caller ID will be considered as a prefix lt callerid 3 end gt indicates that the caller ID from its 3 digit and up to the end will be applied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with wildcards C Require Authorization for Enabling Desabling Description o Epygi head e lt dialednum range gt used to apply the complete or a part of dialed number the number dialed by the caller to place for on Calter Cali Type Mocity Caller 10 a call as a prefix For example lt dialednum 1 3 gt indicates Z See Date Time Portocks that the first 3 digits of the dialed number will be considered as a prefix lt dialednum 3 end gt indicates that the dialed number from its 3 digit and up to the end will be applied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other exwse 2 digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with Fig 11 136 Call Routing Wizard page 1 wildcards A two stage dialing allows successive numbers to be dialed one a
135. eive a notice when new firmware is available and will be able to download it from the Epygi Technical Support WEB page Updating new firmware requires a working power supply Quadro is provided with a battery accumulator If the battery is low or simply absent the There is no battery or voltage is low warning is displayed Please Note Installing new firmware will take about 15 minutes During this time Quadro telephony and Internet access will be disabled The firmware update will cause the loss of the following data Moin Syitemnm Users Telephorw bbeii Uplink Hliva rra le Firmware update e All internally stored voice mails and custom voice O A messages in Please Note If you do not wish to lose your voice data eN have it downloaded from Configuration Management page prior to starting the Firmware Update Hamal chired voice mails and cusin mico massages CP jeanet CP legge a EEE The fansfer elalistice Ga aiii i a LC Pandey een ser specie OU sises The follan processes will be shopped in Tee System resources yiii damani e DHCP leases e Transfer statistics e Call statistics Please Note If you consider the Call Statistics entries in the displayed tables to be important it is recommended to download them from the corresponding page prior to starting the Firmware Update e All pending events e User specific GUI states Heswock Time Protocol Daemon Network Imerfate Stssste Daemon
136. elephesy iiteinet Upaink elvan O pr gl The area Transmit Values provides the following Transmit Bytes number of transmitted bytes Transmit Packets number of transmitted Ethernet packets Transmit Errors number of transmitted packets containing errors Transmit Drop Errors number of transmitted packets that have been discarded Transmit Carrier Errors number of transmit carrier errors that occur due to a defective or lost connection on the Ethernet link Transmit Collisions number of transfer errors that occurred during a simultaneous packet transmission from both sides To see the Transfer Statistics Diagram Charts select the desired criteria and click Show to generate the corresponding chart and the table showing the transfer statistics values if enabled The letters M millions and K thousands used in the legend of the displayed diagrams show the total number of specified criteria The Reset Statistics button is used to reset the chart and the table if enabled Fig Il 16 Transfer Statistics Diagram Chart Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Eh Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Lines Status The table Lines Status shows the current status of each IP line and ISDN trunk with all details of active calls Since only one line information is displayed at a time the IP Line and ISDN Trunk functional buttons are used to navigate through the other IP lines or ISDN trunks informa
137. em Emulation Logout e Upload Language Pack e RIP Streaming Channels e User Rights Management The functional button Renew Wan IP Address appears on the administrators main Quadro Management page if the Quadro device acts as a DHCP client The Renew WAN IP Address button is used to obtain a new WAN IP address in case e g the Quadro moves to another network The functional button Establish Your Internet Connection Now respectively Terminate Your Internet Connection Now occurs on the Quadro Management page if PPPoE is used as WAN interface protocol The link Please Check Your Pending Events will be displayed on the administrator Main Menu page if new system events exist The link leads to the Events page that can be also accessed from the System menu The list of Users currently logged into the system is seen in the lower right corner of the Administrator s Main Menu Information about IP address user accessed Quadro GUI from the username user is logged in and the time until the next automatically logout is provided herein The current version of the Quadro s firmware and of its boot loader is also available here The idle session timeout is set to 20 minutes If no action is performed during that time user will be automatically moved to the Login page and will be requested to login again Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 5 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator Recurrent Buttons Throughout this gui
138. ements to the IP Lines password strength and the Security Report granularity The security levels are as follows e Low There are no specific restrictions on the strength of the saved password Only the critical warnings on the Call Routing Rules to PSTN and IP PSTN disabled Firewall and IDS will be generated in Security Report e Medium The minimum strength of the IP Line passwords should be good The Security Report will generate warnings on all unsecured Call Routing rules IP Line passwords Firewall level if it is set to lower than Medium and disabled IDS e High The minimum strength of the IP Line passwords should be strong The Security Report will generate warnings on the IP Line passwords disabled IDS unsecured SIP and unsecured Routing Rules to SIP PSTN and IP PSTN and also regarding the Firewall level if it is set to lower than High The Enable SIP IDS checkbox allows to prevent the SIP attacks The System Security Diagnostics page allows running the security audit and getting the security reports The Start Security Audit functional button is used for running the security audit The Quadro Security Audit is a security reporting system which generates the warnings regarding the Quadro s weaknesses relative to the selected Security Level The warnings may vary depending on the selected global Security Level The Security Audit will detect the security related configuration issues in Firewall IDS IP Line passwords Cal
139. enables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension and is used to define a remote Voice Mail Server as a location for the Voice Mails Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi In this case recorded voice mails will be collected on the oe remote server Radio button selection enables a sub group Extensions Management Edit Entry of manipulation radio buttons If the remote Voice Mail Server is combined with the SIP Voice Mailbox Settings 11 SIP Settings Proxy server it is recommended to select Proxy PENA o Disable Voice Mail a O Controlled Mailbox Type With this selection SIP proxy Use Internal Voice Mail Configuration wizard status Inactive SIP Advanced Settings Remote Settings will keep the recorded voice mail on itself When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing 0 the call will be Voice Mailbox Settings redirected to the voice mailbox on the proxy server TEER Call Queue Settings O Use External Voice Mail Transport Protocol for SIP messages If the remote Voice Mail Server acts as a standalone location of voice mails it is recommended to select Independent Mailbox Type With this selection Quadro redirects the recorded voice mails to the defined remote Voice Mail server When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing 0 the call will be redirected to the remote voice mail server Proxy Controlled Mailbox Type Voice Mail Retrieve SIP URI Go To User
140. er Port 21 Update Method ftp Username and Password empty Check and notify Every day at 0 00 Event Settinas Display notification for all except Login and Firmware Update Those events have 9 Do nothing action assigned NTP Server and Client enabled Time Date Settings Predefined NTP Server ntp1 epygi com Polling interval 6 System Mail Settings disabled SSL disabled Mail Settings Enable SMTP Authentication disabled User Name empty User Password empty SMS Settings Disabled SNMP Settings SNMP disabled no SNMP traps defined User Logging enabled Developer Logging disabled Archived Logging disabled Remote Logging disabled 3pcc support no key found Features IP phone support no key found QCM support no key found Language Pack Default English sail Custom Language Pack none Users admin enabled localadmin disabled Roles Extension all accessible pages for extension Local Administrators all accessible pages for localadmin Regional Settings and Preferences Configuration Management System Logs Settings User Rights Management GUI Access Password Old Password empty New Password empty Confirm New Password empty Phone Access Password Old Password empty New Password empty Confirm New Password empty Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 115 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Extension Lengt
141. er all call codes at a glance Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide The Quadro Manual is divided into three parts e Manual l Installation Guide gives step by step instructions to provision the Quadro IP PBX and configure the phone extensions with the Epygi SIP Server After successfully configuring the Quadro IP PBX users will be able to make SIP phone calls to remote Quadro devices make local calls to the PSTN and access the Internet from devices connected to the LAN e Manual ll Administrator s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for administrators only It includes a list of all System Default Values e Manual lil Extension User s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for extension users A list of all call codes can be found there too This guide contains many example screen illustrations Since Quadro IP PBXs offer a wide variety of features and functionality the example screens shown may not appear exactly the same for your particular Quadro IP PBX as they appear in this manual The example screens are for illustrative and explanatory purposes and should not be construed to represent your own unique environment Quadro s Graphical Interface describes to the Quadro s graphical user interface and explains all recurrent buttons Administrators Menus explains the Administrator s management pages according to the menu structure
142. er to retrieve the parked call For example the Call Park service is enabled for extension 23 which has been registered on the SIP Server under the 892220 registration username While being on a call with user A the Quadro user dials the appropriate calling code As a reply Quadro will play the 892220 to the Quadro user while user A is put on hold The Quadro user then moves to a different location and makes an SIP call to the 892220 number When this SIP call is established to the 892220 number user A will then be connected to the Quadro user and the conversation will resume Please Note Any PBX or IP calls addressed to the extension where the call has been parked will require you to pass the authentication to reconnect the Destination party being parked The parked Destination party will be disconnected if an incorrect password has been inserted and authentication has been rejected To avoid unexpected calls received on the extension used for the call parking it is recommended to use virtual extensions for the Call Park service Upload Universal Extension Recordings The Upload Universal Extension Recordings are to be defined by the Quadro administrator and will be present instead of the default voice messages for all extensions on the Quadro They will be used when no custom messages have been uploaded or recorded The following system messages can be uploaded from this page Hold Music played to the held user Voice Mail Regular Greet
143. ered to the destination asswort i side upon call establishment procedure Y Enable Activity Timeout AS a Ml session Y Header Activity Timeout 95 SIP Tunnel drop down list appears only when the SIP_Tunnel Muser Mio Use RTP Proxy Call Type is selected on the previous page The list is used to nia Meis select the particular SIP tunnel to route the calls through the v corresponding Quadro Ml Local Authentication RADIUS Authentication and Authorization Destination Host requires the IP address or the host name of MIRADIUS Accounting the destination for a direct call or the SIP server for calls i Client Code Identification through the SIP server Destination Port requires the port number of the destination or of the SIP server Failover Reason s O check with 3PCC User Name and Password require the identification settings for the public SIP server or servers requiring authentication Failover Reasonfs Enable Activity Timeout checkbox is used to limit time to live ane ida ei a period of routing pattern makes sense if accept or failure Network Failure System Failure feedback arrives too late from the destination Checkbox selection enables the Activity Timeout text field which is used to insert a routing pattern activity timeout in the range from 1 to 180 seconds When timeout is configured the routing pattern will be active within the defined time frame and if no response has been received from the de
144. ersion 5 2 x 18 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide IP Routing Configuration Administrator s Menus Routing is used to relay information across the Internet from a source to a destination Along the way at least one intermediate node is typically encountered Routing is different than bridging The main difference between bridging and routing is that bridging operates at the OSI Data Link Layer Level Two Media Access Control Layer and routing operates at OSI Network Layer Level Three Quadro s IP Routing service allows you to route IP packets from one destination to another or to a specified router through Quadro or a Quadro VPN The IP Routing Configuration page is used to make IP Static IP Policy and VPN routes for IP packets routing This page consists of three tables Entries in the tables are color coded according to the state of the route For example yellow indicates disabled routes green indicates successful routes and red indicates routes with an error IP Static Routes are used to forward IP packets from the Network where the Quadro is connected to the specified destination The IP Static Routes table displays all established IP static routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet where the incoming packets should be routed to and Via IP Address for the router
145. ertain routing rules in the Call Routing Table You can set the same Enabler Disabler Key for multiple routing rules the same key may be used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one this will allow managing several routing rules with the single key Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 75 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The second page of the Call Routing Wizard offers different A A Aa en Ra Cepysi components depending on the Call Type selected on the previous page Call Routing Wizard Use Extension Settings drop down list is applicable to SIP and IP PSTN call types and allows you to select the extension also Auto Attendant on behalf of the call that will be placed The SIP Routing Call Settings Add Entry settings of the selected extension will be used as the caller Use Extension Settings 11 i Keep Original Caller ID Transport Protocol for SIP messages information If an entry is not selected from this list the original Mira caller information will be kept When Keep original DID checkbox is selected the called destination will receive the original caller s information and not the information of the O TCP Destination Host 10 20 30 10 Destination Port 506 0 SIP Privacy extension selected from the Use Extension Settings list 3 Username quadro_user When the checkbox Add Remote Party ID is selected the a O Remote Party ID parameter is being deliv
146. erver port may only contain digit values otherwise the error message SIP Server Port is incorrect will be displayed when applying the extension settings If the SIP server port is not specified Quadro will access the SIP server through the default port 5060 Registration on SIP Server enables the SIP server registration option If the extension has already been registered on an SIP server its IP address will be displayed in brackets 3 SIP Advanced Settings This group is used to configure advanced SIP settings Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server settings and to define other SIP server specific settings The SIP Outbound proxy is an SIP server where all the SIP requests and other SIP messages are transferred Some SIP servers use an outbound proxy server to escape restrictions of NAT For example Free World Dialup service uses an Outbound Proxy server If an Outbound proxy is specified for an extension all SIP calls originating from that extension are made through that outbound proxy i e all requests are sent to that outbound proxy even those made by Speed Calling The Secondary SIP Server acts as an alternative SIP registration server when the primary SIP Registration Server is inaccessible If the connection with the primary SIP server fails Quadro will automatically start sending SIP messages to the Secondary SIP Server It will switch back to the primary SIP server as soon as the
147. es If the routing record has an authorization enabled on the enabler disabler key administrator s password will be required to be inserted 900 after the key Once the administrator s password is dialed system plays a confirmation about the accepted configuration and the state of the certain routing rule s is getting modified If administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even to those which have no authorization enabled Administrator Login menu has the following sub menus and the management keys Auto Attendant Greeting Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to Current AA Greeting Record a New AA Greeting Restore Default AA Greeting Stop Recording or Playback Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Auto Attendant Menu Message Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to AA Menu Message O Record a New AA Menu Message Restore Default AA Menu Message Stop Recording or Playback 409 Administrator s Login Greeting Message Listen to Current Greeting Message 2 Record a Universal Greeting Message Restore System Default Greeting Message Stop Recording or Playback Greeting Message Universal Extension Messages Incoming Blocking Message Listen to Current Incoming Blocking Message O Record a Universal Incoming Blocking Message
148. ess thereto and that no unauthorized copy publication disclosure or distribution thereof in whole or in part in any form shall be made 7 Limited Warranty The only warranty the Licensor makes to you in connection with this license is that the media on which the Licensed Materials are recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from the date of purchase the Warranty Period If you determine within the Warranty Period that the media on which the Licensed Materials are recorded are defective the Licensor will replace the media without charge as long as the original media are returned to the Licensor with satisfactory proof of purchase and date of purchase within the Warranty Period This warranty is limited to you as the licensee and is not transferable The foregoing warranty does not extend to any Licensed Materials that have been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE OR WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS DEFECTS OMISSIONS INACCURACIES FAILURES DELAYS OR INTERRUPTIONS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LACK OF VIRUSES AND ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRI
149. etwork Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Local Subnet lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from all stations of the local network to all stations of the remote LAN VPN gateway devices are not included In this case the local and remote subnet IP addresses and subnet masks have to be entered in the corresponding text fields Local Subnet IP and Remote Subnet IP More than one of the above checkboxes may be selected to specify the desired communication relations The Stop Connection if not successful checkbox allows you to stop the IPSec connection attempts if the partner is still unreachable after the timeout period If the checkbox is not selected the system will continue to try to reach the IPSec connection partner The right side of the page offers the following security settings for key exchange data encryption and authentication The area Keying Type offers the choice between automatic and manual keying To use manual keying the Static IP Remote Gateway needs to be selected Auto Keying requires the ESP Encapsulated Security payload and IKE Internet Key Exchange settings in addition to Diffie Helman Group settings to be selected for the automatic keying exchange Encryption and Authentication parameters should be defined for each of these standards as well as for the Manual Keying The Encryption drop down list offers the following standards for selection DES Data Encryption Standard i
150. ew RSA public key This may take several seconds 3 Enter a destination e mail address in the Email this key to peer text field then press Send to send the new RSA public key To Delete Stop Start Enable Disable a VPN Connection 1 Select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding connections that should to be deleted stopped started from the Connections tables Press Select all to delete stop start all connections 2 Click on the Delete Stop Start button from the table s menu to perform the corresponding operation for the selected VPN connection s 3 If deleting confirm it with pressing on Yes The VPN connection will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the VPN connection in the list click No Dynamic DNS Settings The Dynamic DNS DynDNS is a service that is used to map a dynamic IP address to a host name This service is used if you are connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and PPP DHCP client and want to allow access from the Internet to a device behind the firewall For example if you want to run your own WEB server To enable the DynDNS service on Quadro you first have to choose a DynDNS provider and register at their website Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 98 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Dynamic DNS Settings page provides the following components Mam System Users Telephone ternit Uplink Helwork epygi The Enable Dynamic DNS checkbox selection enables t
151. example if the event was caused by the IDS service the Check IDS link appears in the reference row that will lead to the IDS Log page or if the event has occurred due to incorrect mail sending or SIP registration the corresponding links will be seen in the Reference column of the table The administrator can view the detailed log for each event that has occurred The System Events page offers the following components Current System Time displays the local date and time on Quadro Mark all as read marks newly occurred events as read Reset LED switches off the flashing LED if applicable on the board An LED notification may appear depending on the notification type given in the page Events page when a new event occurs Fig Il 38 System Events list Quadro4Li SW Version RA Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mom System Users Tekpioy internet Uplink Herwork epyei Event Settings Numerous circumstances may cause a certain application on Quadro to flag an event The Event Settings page lists all possible events on the Quadro and allows controlling notification action when an event takes place aj ajpo a Each entry in the events table has a checkbox assigned to each row By selecting the corresponding checkboxes operations such as Edit may be done for one or more events Oo e ql pa Edit opens the Edit Event Settings page to modify the event oh Fig
152. eys on the IP phones The SLA lines should be first configured on the Quadro from the Key System Emulation page Each SLA line can correspond to one of the external PSTN lines or be a direct connection to a SIP server Once configured SLA lines can be assigned to the programmable keys on the IP phones For the incoming and outgoing calls to be handled each programmable key will correspond to the particular PSTN line or SIP network server The same PSTN line or SIP network can be configured on the different programmable keys for different IP phones When the incoming call comes to an SLA line from PSTN or SIP user all IP phones that use the Key System Emulation are starting to ring and the programmable key assigned to the corresponding SLA line is beginning to blink on all IP phones To pick the incoming call push the blinking programmable key on any of the ringing IP phones The corresponding programmable key will stop blinking on all other IP phones the IP phone rings stop and the programmable keys go to the state ON indicating that the line is busy If a user of one IP phone holds an active call performed on the SLA line the programmable key is starting to blink on all IP phones The user who has held the call can then inform the other IP phone to pick up the held call To pick the held call the user of the other IP phone should simply push the blinking programmable key on his IP phone Once the call is picked the corresponding programmable key wil
153. f non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error message will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error message will appear Fig 11 76 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for pickup extension page The Edit Pickup Group link leads to the page where a list of monitored extensions can be defined Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 42 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Pickup Group of Extension page lists all extensions in the pickup group i e it lists those that can be monitored and the calls addressed to that may be picked up by calling the corresponding pickup extension The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page with a drop down list containing all available extensions on the Quadro Administrator s Menus Main System Users Tedeplicay intarpai Uplink Hetyeanik Pickup Group of Extension 67 fel Delete Selecta bres Selecting Fig 11 77 Pickup Group of Extension page The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for the users to use the pickup service can be defined The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to pickup the calls ringing on the extensions from the Picku
154. fined values included in the drop down list can be used for this setting Dial Plan Settings Fig 11 147 Dial Plan Settings page The Routing Dial Timeout setting will also be applied to all the supported IP phones that are auto configured with the Quadro and provide the possibility of changing this setting through the auto configuration file The modified value of the setting will take effect after rebooting the IP phones 3PCC Settings Main System Users Telepleay haste Uplink Matwork The 3PCC Settings page is used to adjust the third party call controlling settings 3PCC service on the Quadro allows call controlling applications to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro 3PCC Settings This page consists of the following components The Secure Connection checkbox is used enable a secure encrypted connection between the call controlling application and the Quadro Fig 11 148 3PCC Settings page Please Note For successful connection this option should be set up in the same way on both sides enabled or disabled on both sides The Request Timeout text field requires the timeout in seconds during which the Quadro should receive a response to the request from the call controlling application If the response is not received during this timeout Quadro will perform a request dependent default action For example if the call controlling applicatio
155. for compliance with all domestic and foreign laws governing Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP calls U S Government Restricted Rights The Licensed Materials are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 C F R section 52 227 19 or subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 as applicable Entire Agreement It is understood that this Agreement along with the Quadro Installation Guide and User s Manual constitute the complete and exclusive agreement between you and the Licensor and supersede any proposal or prior agreement or license oral or written and any other communications related to the subject matter hereof If one or more of the provisions of this Agreement is found to be illegal or unenforceable this Agreement shall not be rendered inoperative but the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect No Waiver Failure by either you or the Licensor to enforce any of the provisions of this Agreement or any rights with respect hereto shall in no way be considered to be a waiver of such provisions or rights or to in any way affect the validity of this Agreement If one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement are found to be invalid or unenforceable in any respect the validity a
156. fter another with a delay in between For example 11 11018 will call 11 wait until the call is established wait for three seconds and then dial 11018 The capability of automatically dialing successive numbers allows the caller to bypass the IVR system on the call path and establish a direct call The two stage dialing is available for PBX ISDN and E1 T1 if available on the model call types Suffix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in the end of the routing pattern For example if the routing Pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the Prefix is 909 and Suffix is Oa the final phone number will be 9093450a Call Type gives you the option to select the call type The following call types are available e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions e PBX Voicemail calls directly to the voice mailbox of the local PBX extension e PBX Intercom local calls to PBX extensions with the request of Intercom service see Manual III Extension Users Guide e SIP calls through a SIP server e ISDN calls to a ISDN global telephone network Metric allows entering a rating for the selected route in a range from O to 20 If a value is not inserted into this field 10 will be used as the default If two route entries match a user s dial string the route with the lower metric will be chosen The Description text field requires an optional desc
157. g Channel page The Add Entry page includes the following text fields Ma le 1 l mil idin od rimja Bid ine etm E The RTP Channel Name text field requires the name or the number of the RTP channel et eee The Port Number text field requires the broadcasting RTP port number The Description text field requires optional information related to the RTP streaming channel Fig 11 155 RTP Streaming Channel Add Entry page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 90 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Internet Uplink Menu Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network PPP PPTP Settings YPN Configuration Dynamic DNS Settings Firewall NAT Filtering Rules Call Start Time Call Duration Calling F se te i No items in list Quadro4Li Management Active Calls Boot loader 5 0 3 Release Firmware Version 5 0 4 Release Users currently logged in Internet connection status DHCP Client Renew WAN IP Address Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 156 Internet Uplink menu in Dynamo theme PPP PPTP Settings Cecpysi Refresh in 590 seconds admin from 192 168 0 1 expires 16 05 admin from 192 168 0 1 expires 15 56 admin from 192 168 0 201 expires 16 04 Administrator s Menus Internet Uplink vane epygi 04Li109 e System e Users e Telephony e Internet Uplink o PPP PPTP Settings o VPN Configuration o Dynamic DNS Setting
158. g destination If the call is set into the queue the caller will hear a message asking them to wait until the call will be answered Once the receptionist or extension user terminates the call the next call in the queue will ring to the user For regular IP users indication about the callers in the queue is through the Call Waiting service see Manual Ill Extension Users Guide When a new caller arrives to the call queue the phone display if available of the phone connected to the IP will display the total number of callers in the queue along with the name phone number of the last caller Extension Status Quadro provides the possibility of controlling and determining the actual state of the managers phones through the receptionist s IP phone configuration of the IP phone is done automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard A programmable key on the receptionist s IP phone that is assigned to the corresponding manager will blink when an incoming call to the manager s phone is currently ringing The key lamp will be ON when manager is on a call and will be OFF if the manager s phone is in the idle state The extension status can be watched viewed by the receptionist to determine the availability of managers for incoming call transfers to them Call Interception To use Call Interception service the managers phones watch option should be enabled and each manager should have a programmable key assi
159. g for SLA inactive onvarding for SLAS Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Pressing on the SLA link will open the corresponding SLA line settings see below The Advanced Configuration link moves to the Key System Advanced _ Settings page that is used to enable disable the blind transfer service from SLA lines to extensions or their voice mailboxes Fig 11 149 Key System Emulation page Key System Emulation SLA The Key System Emulation SLA page is used to configure the corresponding SLA line on the Quadro and contains the following components The SLA Name text field is used to insert the preferred name for the corresponding SLA line On the IP phones with the display available this name is visible on the display next to the programmable key A group of manipulation radio buttons allow you to configure the SLA line Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 87 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Inactive disables the corresponding SLA line PSTN allows you to assign the SLA line to the available PSTN lines on the Quadro This selection disappears when there are no more unassigned PSTN lines available Attention By assigning a PSTN line to an SLA line it becomes unavailable for calls through Auto Attendant or Call Routing Table SIP used to assign the SLA line to the certain SIP server This selection has two sub selections e Custom Setting
160. g table Hence when transferring a call to the assigned extension incoming call will directly go to the extension s voice mailbox Multi Company Receptionist Quadro provides the possibility to use a single IP phone to manage the receptionist s features for multiple companies at the same time To do so the incoming line appearance for the phone should be created attached to the IP line of the IP phone and be labeled to the corresponding company name Being busy with a call related to one company the receptionist is able to also receive the calls related to other companies While calls are ringing in the background the receptionist can switch between the incoming calls If the receptionist does not answer the incoming calls and if the Call Queue service is enabled on the extensions the incoming calls will be stored in the queue specific for each company line Man Stem Users Telephony korma Upik Mete Receptlonist Managment Add EM Delete Selecta po necio Alt pe hel EP Lise The Receptionist Management page allows you to configure IP phones to be used as a receptionist on the Quadro This page contains the list of configured receptionists with information about the attached IP lines and watched extensions Fig 11 91 Receptionist Management page Add opens the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard where the new receptionist phone can be created and configured The wizard consists of several pages The Receptionist Phone Confi
161. g the checkbox will enable the blind oo transfer functionality to extensions You may optionally specify a prefix that should precede the calls to extensions Specifying a prefix is mandatory if the extension numbers have the same Copyright C 2003 2008 Epval Technologies Ltd All rights reserved length as the SIP usernames on the SIP server on which the SLA is registered Fig 11 153 Key System Emulation Advanced Configuration page Please Note If the Enable blind transfer extension checkbox is disabled all calls initiated from SLAs are routed to the SIP server on which the SLA is registered if any If the checkbox is enabled but no prefix is specified outgoing calls will be routed to the SIP server only if the number of dialed digits does not math the extension length specified on the system Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 89 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus RTP Streaming Channels The RTP Streaming Channels page is used to configure channels where the broadcast RTP streams are transmitted These channels may be then configured to be used as hold music see Manual III Extension User s Guide or any other type of music played to the caller Mi Uni rs a we oe Ue o bes ti Meret RTP Streaming Channets The RTP Streaming Channels page consists of a table where RTP channels are listed Add opens the Add Entry page where a new RTP channel can be added Fig 11 154 RTP Streamin
162. generated legible configuration file to one specific extension For example each of the extensions on the Quadro have own SIP settings or Codecs To download the settings for a particular extension only you need to choose the corresponding extension from the list The drop down may also have a blank selection In that case the legible configuration file will contain the parameter of all available extensions on the Quadro if the selected parameter applies to the extension and not to the overall system like RTP settings The Start generate a legible configuration file button start parsing the configuration structure of the device for the defined parameters The progress will be displayed in the area below The Cancel generation process button appears when the configuration generation procedure starts and it is used to stop it The Download generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to download the generated file to the PC in a plain text format Necessary changes can be made in the downloaded configuration file and then uploaded back to the system Attention Make sure the changes you have done in the downloaded legible configuration file are valid and will not corrupt the system when being uploaded back to device The View generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to view the generated file direc
163. gned on the receptionist s IP phone This is performed automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard When an incoming call addressed to the certain manager comes in the receptionist can see the corresponding programmable key blinking and the callers ID on the phone s display The receptionist is able to intercept the incoming call by pressing the blinking key The caller will then be connected to the receptionist If the receptionist does not answer the call addressed to the manager and if the manager does not answer it either the call will be directed to the manager s voice mailbox if it is enabled If the manager s voice mailbox is not enabled the call will be disconnected Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 50 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Kickback Quadro allows the receptionist to forward the incoming calls to the manager s extension and if there is no answer the call is returned to the receptionist s phone instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer the call will automatically get back to the receptionist Voicemail Transfer Quadro allows the receptionist or extension user to forward incoming calls directly to the voice mail of the other attached extension To do so an appropriate routing pattern should be added to the Call Routin
164. guration Wizard Page 1 has a O Uptin Ietwork the following components o o Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Description text field requires the description of the receptionist to be configured IP Phone Model The Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist The MAC Address text fields require the MAC Address of the corresponding IP phone Based on the selected IP phone model and the inserted MAC Address the IP phone can be automatically configured by simple reset reboot for more information about IP phone configuration refer to the corresponding IP phone s users manual The Attached IP Lines text field requires the numbers of Quadro s IP lines used by the receptionist The IP lines should be separated by commas Fig 11 92 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Page 1 The Use Session Timer enables the SIP session timer for the IP lines specified in the Attached IP Lines text field This checkbox enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The Use Kickback checkbox enables the kickback service on the corresponding receptionist When this service is enabled if receptionist transfers the incoming calls to the extension and if there is no answer or if the called extension is busy on another call the call is returned to the receptionist s phone
165. h 2 once applied extensions 00 11 28 appear Extensions Management All extensions are shown Display name none Password empty 11 28 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 18 Extension Settings General Use Kickback disabled Call Relay disabled Login Allowed disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory 5 Registration username and password automatically generated SIP server sip epygi com Extension Settings SIP SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration enabled for extensions 11 20 disabled for extensions 21 28 Authentication User Name undefined Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy disabled RTP Priority Level medium Extension Settings SIP Advanced Do Not Use SIP Old Hold Method disabled Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for Secondary SIP Server undefined Secondary SIP Server Port 5060 Extension Settings Remote Remote Extension disabled Extension Settings Call Queue Call Queue disabled y Voice Mailbox Internal Voice Mail Extension Settings Voice Mailbox l Configuration Wizard Status activated Extension Settings Licensing QCM License inactive Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a enabled G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 iLBC disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled Extension Settings Codecs T 38 FAX disabled Pass Thr
166. h allows you to set the a corresponding extension to be used by the QCM application soa ar ma serenos When the checkbox is not selected on this page the QCM will be functional with the extension only during trial period Fig 11 75 Extensions Management Edit Entry License Settings page Please Note This checkbox can be simultaneously selected on as many extensions as QCM licenses are available on the Quadro The Go to User Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the extension specific Extension s Main Menu page see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide The Go to Line Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the Line Settings page of the corresponding extension Pickup Group Extension Settings Pickup Group amp Access List The Pickup Group service is used to monitor calls addressed to a certain list of extensions and to pick up calls ringing on the listed extensions This service may be used when a group of extensions are located in the same area so the persons nearby can hear the ringing on one of the extensions This feature allows you to pick up the call ringing on a certain extension by dialing the number of the pickup extension The Pickup Group list is used to define the extensions that can be monitored by calling a certain pickup extension The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are allowed or forbidden to intercept calls ringing on extensions in the Pickup Group If a
167. he oynam DAS Servico Dynamic DNS Settings The User text field requires the username specified during the registration at the DynDNS provider The Password text field requires the password specified during the registration at the DynDNS provider quacrouserd 01 The Max time between updates text field requires entering the period between two updates in hours The values entered in these fields should be greater than 24 otherwise the error message Update interval times smaller than 24 hours are too small will appear Normally whenever you set up a connection to the Internet the DynDNS is updated at least once in the period indicated in this field The Use predefined service radio button leads to the manual cians apvgicom configuration of the DynDNS service The selection enables the i following optional settings The Service drop down list contains the provider list where the administrator needs to select the one that it has been subscribed to Fig 11 173 Dynamic DNS Settings page The Host text field requires the name of the host on the Internet The TZO Connection Type text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider TZO The DHS Cloak Title text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider DHS The Mail Exchange text field requires the address of the e mail server where the DynDNS service provider will relay your e mails Attention If this service is used ensure
168. he corresponding extensions and a possibility to retrieve the calls parked to that extension This list also contains a number of PBX services available on the Quadro and accessible with the key combination see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this page the key combinations become transparent for the IP phones too e Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to Fig Il 95 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration for Snom phone Mam System Users Telephony Piet me Unir Metwork Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration Prog ammabile Key Fimction Lineinfy CallPik Watch Ext 11 Watch En 45 Watch Ext 68 Call Park Ext 77 07 Epral Teshiralczias 110 All aght retered Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 52 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to Mam System Users Telephony BAe Up Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard e AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call Softkeys Configuration e CallBack calls back to the last caller Key Fuctionality e Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro wanes
169. he Quadro s LAN When this table is configured the devices with defined hostnames and MAC addresses will always get the same LAN IP address from the DHCP server Otherwise devices not listed in this table will get dynamic LAN IP addresses This table is also displayed in the System Configuration Wizard Add functional button opens an Add Host page where a new static MAC address binding can be defined The page consists of the following components lies Telephony Irterrret lipni Metwork Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in aes the Quadro s LAN MAC Address text fields require the MAC address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Horna uvadrot 13 DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Add Host Static IP Address text fields require a fixed IP address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Clipboard Please Note If you leave this field empty the device in the Quadro s LAN will get the first available IP address from range defined in the DHCP Settings page see above Fig 11 192 Static MAC address binding Add Host page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 106 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus View DHCP Leases leads to the page where the DHCP leased LAN IP addresses are listed The DHCP Leases page includes a list of the leased host addresses that are part of the Quadro s LAN For these hosts Quadro acts as a server supplying them wi
170. he Quadro should be defined in the Username and Password text fields Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 39 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide When the Enable RTP Proxy checkbox is selected incoming and outgoing RIP streams to and from the remote SIP phone will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will be moving directly between peers When the Fallback To Local Extension When Not Registered checkbox is selected incoming calls towards the corresponding extension on the Quadro will be forwarded to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise when the remote SIP phone is unregistered incoming calls will be routed to the line extension it is attached to When this checkbox is not selected all incoming calls will be routed to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise if the remote SIP phone is unregistered calls will be forwarded to the extension s voice mailbox The Symmetric RTP checkbox should be selected when the remote extension is located behind the symmetrical NAT 5 Call Queue Settings Mam System Users Administrator s Menus Teleptiony P ernet Upin Wetworh Extensions Management Edit Entry Ge To User Serinas Ge To Line Settinos SIP Remote Extension Settings 11 Fig 11 72 Extensions Management Edit Entry Remote Settings page This group is used to configure the Call Queue service that allows multiple incoming calls t
171. he RTP Settings page allows the administrator to configure the codec s packet size and silence suppression for each voice codec to select the G726 codec standard to define RTP RTCP port ranges etc All parameters listed on this page may be modified and submitted The Codec Properties table lists all codecs with the corresponding packetization interval and information about silence suppression Edit opens the Edit RTP Settings page where the codec settings can be modified To use Edit only one codec may be selected at a time otherwise the One record should be selected error message appears The Packetization Interval is the time interval between two RTP packets of the same stream lf the interval is increased the Main System Users Telephony imemetupink Network overhead is decreased but the voice quality may deteriorate as a result If the interval is decreased the network load is RTP Settings increased and the delay is reduced Codec Properties Cit Silence Suppression disables RIP packet transmission in Codecs Packetizapon interval Silence Suppression case of no voice activity This feature helps to avoid extra traffic rre cala cos a 0108 AA Po if the RTP stream contains no voice activity lt is activated after a AA O hie two seconds of silence and restarted immediately if any audio DS appears 6726 24 ADPCM speech coding af 24 kbit s rate The G 726 Standard radio buttons are used to select between 6726 32 ADPCM speech c
172. he available PPTP and L2TP connections on the Quadro A connection selected from this list will be used to route the IP packet from the Quadro s LAN to the peer behind the PPTP L2TP tunnel Route To requires the IP address range of the possible peers behind the PPTP L2TP tunnel whereto the IP packets should be routed Fig 11 31 Add VPN Route page The Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to activate or to deactivate the selected route s At least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear To Add an IP Static Route Select the IP Static Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the IP Static Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Enter the destination IP address and subnet mask in the Route To text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previously entered IP address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address text fields Press the Save button to make the static route with these settings are To Add an IP Policy Route Select the IP Policy Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the IP Policy Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Specify the policy routing rule priority in the Priority text field Enter the packet source IP address and subnet mask in the From text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previousl
173. he caller for verifying the input and selecting the user to connect Each extension s user should record their name with the help of the handset see chapter Update System Messages or they can upload a wave file from the Account Settings page Maan Spia Usera Pb pad rior iie 1d Lili Hot oak The Custom Greeting column in the Extensions Extenslons Directory Settings Directory table displays whether or not a custom greeting user s name is recorded or uploaded Users cannot be accessed through the Extensions Directory and it is implied as being an inactive entry in the event a custom greeting is not recorded or uploaded Warnings will be seen in the Extensions Directory table for inactive entries Extension numbers in the Extensions Directory table are made as a link to move to the corresponding extension s Account Settings page This helps the administrator access the extension s settings page where a custom greeting can be manually uploaded Fig 11 98 Extension Directory table Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 53 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Move Up and Move Down are used to move the selected record one level up or down in the Extensions Directory table The sequence of the entries in the Extensions Directory is important if several records match the same spelled name The Extensions Directory table is parsed from the top down and the matched entries will be played according to their position i
174. he one applied by the caller the ISDN line must be available on the Quadro there must be network connectivity and the destination must be reachable The PSTN caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the PSTN caller will be reconnected to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 56 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Telephony Menu Man Sytem Lems Trbegescey terme Lipdink Materark Cal Siabisdcs SIP Setings Quadro4Li Manag RTP Stings NAT Traversal Settings Active Calls Fig 11 102 Telephony Menu in Dynamo Theme Administrator s Menus Fig 11 103 Telephony Menu in Plain Theme Call Statistics The Call Statistics page displays four tables They provide information on successful unsuccessful and missed incoming and outgoing calls on the first three tables and statistics settings on the fourth page Call statistics allows the collecting of call events on the Quadro with their parameters and to search them by various criteria The Statistics Settings page offers the following input options The Enable Call Reporting checkbox enables Call Statistics reporting The selected number of statistics entries will be displayed in the Call Statistics tables The Maximal Number of Displayed Call Records drop down lists are used to select the number of
175. he specification of the upstream and downstream speeds in kbit s helping to assure the quality of IP calls An IP call looses the voice quality if there is no available bandwidth When approaching the limits of bandwidth capacity another IP call will be declined The bandwidth provided by the ISP has to be specified in the text fields Upstream Speed and Downstream Speed The default entry in both fields is 10000 the maximum bandwidth of a 10 MB Ethernet The bandwidth required by an IP call depends on the codecs used and these specifications are listed in the tables below Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 9 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Required Bandwidth for Standard Packets Administrator s Menus Packet Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs sate G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a iLBC 13 33 10 105 58 66 74 82 50 20 84 37 45 53 61 29 30 76 30 38 45 53 22 27 40 74 27 34 42 50 19 50 71 25 32 40 48 17 60 67 22 30 37 45 15 20 Required Bandwidth for Encrypted Packets when a VPN is used Packet Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs Pei G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a LBC 13 33 10 148 98 105 118 124 92 20 105 59 65 74 81 49 30 90 43 52 60 66 35 41 40 85 38 45 53 61 30 50 80 34 41 48 56 26 60 74 29 37 45 52 22 26 The Min Data Rate text field requires the amount of upstream bandwidth that ought to remain for data applications even if voice applicat
176. he voice data and store it in the specified location Fig Il 32 Configuration Management page Man System Users Telephorf imaret Liplink Nene The Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page allows you to enable the automatic backup of the system configuration and the voice data on the Quadro With this Automatically Backup Configuration Settings service Quadro will automatically backup the system El Enable Automalicall Backup configuration and the voice data and store it in the specified i aad oe location E Bondio SOM Sonernam 12 168 7018 This page contains the following components cmt TT Path on Server 7382 The Enable Automatically Backup checkbox enables automatic backup mechanism on the Quadro Send Method The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you ol rm to select whether the backup files will be delivered by email i E or stored in some location The Send via Email radio button is used to send the automatically backed up files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email Een Der E address of the administrating person to receive the Backup How automatically backup files 7 The Send to Server radio button is used to store the automatically backup files on a remote server This mos selection enables the following fields to be inserted Fig Il 33 Configuration Management page Password seen Rat Ini Heii The Server Name requires the IP ad
177. her its priority The number of question marks outside braces brackets The more question marks outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please Note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 4 The number of square brackets The more brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of braces The more braces a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of asterisks The fewer asterisks a pattern contains the higher its priority The value of the metric The lower the metric of a pattern is the higher its priority The position in the routing table The higher the position of a pattern in the routing table is the higher its priority 81 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Example The user has dialed 1231 and the following matching patterns have been found The list of patterns 11 15 3 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 iT oH Step 1 The list is split into two groups separating the patterns with lower priority and are pushed back to the end of the list from those without Criterion 1 The patterns with form a group with a Criterion 1 The list split into two subgroups 2271 123 1 3 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 Step 2 The two groups of patterns are arranged separately from each other by the t
178. hese services can be found at http www protocols com pbook ppp htm The Advanced PPP Settings page offers the following group of checkboxes Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 91 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enable automatic PPP restart at checkbox is used to select the time when the PPP connection will automatically be restarted The checkbox selection enables LCP echo failures text field that indicates the number of the LCP echo failure packets received before the PPP connection will be considered as dead and will be restarted Disable CCP Compression Control Protocol negotiation this option should only be selected if the peer system is not working properly For example if it is not accepting the requests from the PPPD Point to Point Daemon for CCP negotiation Disable magic number negotiation with this option PPPD cannot detect a looped back line This option should only be selected if the peer is not working properly Man adem leer lepry kiani ipini hawk Advanced PPP Settings Disable protocol field compression negotiation in both the receive and the transmit direction with this option no protocol field compression will take place Disable Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression in both the transmit and the receive direction with this option no negotiation of TCP IP header compression will take place and the header will always be sent uncompressed Disable the
179. hone Administrator s Menus Main System Users Telephiony irr Uplink Mebwork Cepysi Budo Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules Enable expansion modube Expansion modules counl w Previous Cancel Fig 11 93 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Snom phone Mam System Users Telephony Peet mel Uptre Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules Expansion Modules Module 1 53M Y Module 50M Module 3 436M Y OF Epral Teshiralosias LAS 5 reserved Fig 11 94 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Aastra phone The next page of the wizard is available for Snom and Aastra phones This page is skipped for QCM Phone Model selection The content of this page depends on the configuration made on the first page of the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration page both for Aastra and Snom phones is used to set the correspondence between the selected Functions and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so assign a Function to each programmable key from the drop down list on this page The following options are available in Functions the drop down list e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro and a possibility to pickup the call addressed to that extension e Call Park Ext watch the calls parked to t
180. ically check for a new available firmware on the server and will either notify the administrator or update the firmware right away depending on the configured settings The server configuration can be done manually or through the DHCP server In case of DHCP server replying configuration the corresponding adjustments should be done on the DHCP server to automatically point the Quadro to the destination where the firmware is stored Please Note Independent on the selected server type there should be an auto update folder in the root directory of the server Quadro will check for any new firmware in that specific folder only Besides the firmware bin file the auto update folder should contain supplementary file s to point to the correct firmware file The detailed instructions on the functionality of automatic firmware update as well as server configuration are described in the Automatic Firmware Update document which you can find at the Epygi Web support portal This page consists of the following components The Enable Automatically Firmware Update checkbox selection enables the automatic firmware update service on the Quadro Attention When the older firmware is installed on the Quadro the system configuration will be lost and the device will be factory reset The first manipulation buttons group on this page allows you to choose between the manually configured firmware server and the server defined by Administrator s Me
181. ield requires the caller address for which the current route will be applied The complete list of characters and wildcards allowed in this text field is given below The Inbound Call Type drop down list gives you the option to select the call type PBX SIP ISDN Any used by the inbound caller to reach the Quadro Fig 11 138 Call Routing Wizard page 3 The settings in the Inbound Caller ID Modification group allow Caller IDs of inbound calls to be modified e The Number of Discarded Symbols NDS text field requires the number of digits that should be discarded from the beginning of the Inbound Caller Pattern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear e The Prefix text field requires entering the symbols alphanumerics and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the Inbound Caller Pattern instead of the discarded digits For example if the routing pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the prefix digits are 909 the final phone number will be 909345 Wildcards are allowed here Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 17 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Discard Non Numeric Symbols checkbox is used to discard any non numeric symbols from the Inbound Caller Patte
182. inated Text log and Comma Separated Values cvs file formats The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you to select whether the call statistics files will be delivered by email or stored in some location on the server e The Send via Email radio button is used to send the call statistics files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email address of the administrating person to receive the call statistics files e The Send to Server radio button is used to store the call statistics files on a remote server This selection enables the following fields to be inserted The Server Name requires the IP address or the host name of the remote server The Server Port requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the call statistics files in The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FTP In case of FTP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Download Now button is used to perform a manually immediate download of the call statistics The Number of Records displays the current number of statistics entries in the table For successful calls Total Duration Maximum Duration Average Duration and Minimum Duration statistics are displayed on top of the table The Call Stat
183. ing played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox Voice Mail Out of Office Greeting played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox if the Out of office greeting is enabled Incoming call blocking played when a blocked user calls the extension Outgoing call blocking played when the extension dials a blocked destination Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 49 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Upload Universal Extension Recordings page consists of a table where the universal voice messages are listed Main System Users Titip Bein plink Hetiwok An Upload functional link is present for each voice message recording that is not uploaded in the table and it is used to Upload Universal Extension Recordings upload the custom system message When a message is uploaded the Upload functional link is replaced by Download and Remove functional links respectively These are used to download to the PC and to remove the uploaded system message Mernory Allocation The Memory Allocation group includes a drop down list used arcertags to specify the Percentage of System Memory for the universal Ce ha extension recordings The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro Fig 11 90 Upload Universal Extension Recordings page Please Note Changing the Percentage of System Memory on this page will stop any recordings of uni
184. ing it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Browse buttons open the file chooser window to browse for a new Call Queue welcome message file The uploaded files should to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension which will cause the You do not have enough space warning message 6 Voice Mailbox Settings This group is used to configure voice mailbox storage and consists of a group of manipulation radio buttons to define the location where voice mails will be collected e Disable Voice Mail disables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension With this selection the extension user will be unable to reach their Voice Mail Settings but will be able to access their Voice Mailbox and manage the existing voice mails e Use Internal Voice Mail enables the Voice Mail ser
185. ing order clicking the columns headlines e Extension the two digit number of the extensions on the Quadro The extension numbers are created as links that lead to the page Extensions Management General Settings where the details about the SIP registration of the correspondent extension can be found This column also lists SIP registrations of the SLA lines The links on the SLA line number leads to the Key System Emulation page for the configuration details e Reg Name the registration name used on the SIP server e Server the name of the SIP server where the correspondent extension is registered e Registered this column has to display the value Yes Not registered extension can t be part of this table e Registration Time time of registration The values in this column will be refreshed automatically from time to time The links inside the table will link you to the Extensions Management page where the SIP registration settings may be altered The Detected Connection Type field displays the connection type Quadro currently is acting in direct connection or behind NAT If Quadro is acting behind NAT the NAT machine IP address is also displayed Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 17 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Cepysi 04Li109 Refresh in 895 seconds Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Quadro Status SIP Registration Status General Information Registration on SIP
186. ing the session initiation method on the B channel One of the following options can be selected for the transmission path completion prior to receipt of a call acceptance indication e on channel negotiation at the destination interface e on progress indication with in band information e on call acceptance The Calling Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the origin of call The Called Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the subaddress of the called party of the call The Called Party Numbering Plan and Calling Party Numbering Plan drop down lists correspondingly indicate the numbering plan of the called party s and calling party s number The Incoming Called Digits Size text field indicates the number of received digits in a range from 0 to 255 required to establish a call When this field has a 0 value the system uses either the timeout defined in the T302 field or the Sending Complete Information element messages to establish a call Independent on the value in this field Sending Complete Information element and the pound sign always result in call establishment The Generate Progress tone on IP checkbox selection will generate the progress tone to IP When Generate Progress Tone to PSTN PBX checkbox is selected Quadro generates ring tones to callers during ISDN call dialing This feature is mainly applicable to 2 stage dialing mode Enable CLIR Servi
187. inistrator s Menus The PPTP Server Configuration page is used to configure the PPTP server settings and offers the following components The PPTP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address A ci ME ci range for the PPTP server and clients within the PPTP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict PPTP L2TP Configuration the possible number of clients for the PPTP connection site PDIP Kerns COSTOS LIT Severcontowetera Please Note The first address specified in the PPTP Subnet Sweet Ta Ja A will be assigned to the PPTP server others will be assigned to the clients The PPTP server subnet should be different from the L2TP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error message will appear The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are used to Cia Chas select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected Fig 11 171 PPTP Server Configuration page The L2TP Server Configuration page is used to configure the L2TP server settings and provides the following input options The L2TP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address A A A SAnS mamn range for the L2TP server and clients within the L2TP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict the possible number of clients for the L2TP connection L2TP Server
188. inue to try When the required action is successful Quadro raises an appropriate message To Assign an Action to the Event 1 Select the checkbox of one or more events to assign an action to them Press the Edit button The Edit Event Settings page appears 2 3 Select an action type from the Action radio buttons to notify the administrator about the event 4 Press the Save button to submit the changes or use Back to abort the selected action Time Date Settings The Time and Date Settings page provides information about the current system time and date The settings may be updated through the international time and date servers Time is used to set the local time hour minute Date is used to set the date month day year Timezone provides a selection of world time zones and is used to select the local country time zone Timezones are specified by GMT Greenwich Mean Time and by specific timezones for the United States and Canada Enable Simple Network Time Protocol Server enables the SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol server on Quadro thus Quadro becomes the timeserver for its LAN Enable Simple Network Time Protocol Client enables the SNTP client on the Quadro thus Quadro becomes a client to an external timeserver A checkbox disables Date and Time drop down lists and enables the following parameters The SNTP Servers table lists all defined NTP Servers The Add functional button opens an Add NTP Server page whe
189. ion User Name and Password configured on the SMTP server should be defined in the corresponding text fields Attention The following symbols are not allowed for the Password field Y 1 8 W Send Test Mail is used to initiate a test e mail transmission This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page To configure the System Mail Enable the system mail sending by the Enable checkbox selection Update or set the SMTP host in the SMTP Host text field Update or set the e mail sender address in the Mail Sender Address text field Update or set the e mail address in the Mail Recipient Address text field Enable SMTP Authentication if it is required on the server Insert into the corresponding text fields an authentication User Name and User Password defined by your SMTP server Press the Save button to submit these settings Use the Send Test Mail button to send a test e mail with the configured settings SMS Settings A PIN Mam System Users Telephony ha os vet Upank Network The SMS Settings are used to configure the SMS parameters SMS Settings that will allow Quadro to send the voice mail notifications or event notifications via SMS to the extension user s mobile phone Every extension user can enable voice mail notifications when a new voice mail is received and they can to define their own mobile numbers from the Voice Mail Settings or to set the certain Events notificat
190. ion service is used by authorized PSTN caller to configure or reconfigure by an authorized PSTN caller using a phone and calling to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Remote Call Back Configuration is divided into two modes accessible from the Quadro s Auto Attendant Permanent Call Back and Non Permanent Call Back Please Note Remote Call Back Configuration services are only available when the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox is disabled in Authorized Phones Database for the trusted user Permanent Call Back service allows the callers registered in the Authorized Phones Database to create a new trusted PSTN Caller with Call Back enabled They can also modify the Call Back destination of an existing PSTN Caller in the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s PSTN number that is previously routed to the Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller can use the 00 code see Feature Codes to create a new trusted PSTN Caller as well as to modify the Call Back destination for the already registered Caller in the Authorized Phones Database Entering the Permanent Call Back reconfiguration menu the system will ask the caller to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in Call Back settings After entering the login successfully the PSTN callers should follow the voice instructions for configuring a new entry or reconfiguring the existing entry in Authorized
191. ion to be delivered per SMS However for Quadro to deliver SMS notifications the SMS service should be enabled and SMS settings should be configured from this page Enable SMS Service enables the SMS service on the Quadro User Name and Password text fields require the authentication settings of the SMS server SMS Sender Address requires the source address for the Quadro notification SMS The address defined in this field will be seen in the From field of the SMS delivered to the mobile phone SMS Recipient Address requires a destination mobile number fora test SMS SMS Gateway manipulation radio buttons allow to selected between pre defined Clickatell SMS gateway and the custom defined SMS gateways Fig 11 44 SMS Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 27 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Clickatell this selection allows to use a pre defined SMS gateway Selection enables the API ID text field which indicates a Clicatell specific parameter obtained from the server and should match on both sides e Custom this selection allows to use a custom SMS gateway Selection requires following parameters to be inserted Resource text field requires the HTTP resource name on the SMS gateway for example http sms cgi Parameters text field requires the parameters to be submitted to the resource address The value of this field represents a string with tokens separated by percent s
192. ion user to inform about the new voice mail received or if it serves as a notification for the voice mail author to be informed that the message has been received by the Quadro but is not yet played by the extension user The uploaded file needs to be in the PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension and gives a You do not have enough space warning Browse browses for the notification file that must be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format Download Notification Message appears only if a file has been uploaded previously The link is used to download the audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified The ZeroOut voice mail feature allows a caller that has reached the called extension s voice mailbox to accelerate the automatic redirection feature instead of leaving a message in the extension s Voice Mailbox To activate this feature the caller should dial 0 digit see Feature Codes during the voice mail greeting which invites the caller to leave a message The caller will then be automatically transferred to the destination specified in this page Enable ZeroOut checkbox selection enables the ZeroOut feature and activates the following fields
193. ions use the entire available upstream bandwidth The value selected here needs to be smaller than the upstream bandwidth and is measured in kbit s The WAN IP Configuration page is only displayed if Ethernet or PPTP has been selected to be the uplink protocol It offers the following components The Assign automatically via DHCP radio button selection switches to automatic retrieval of the WAN IP address from a DHCP server at the ISP uplink Please Note DHCP referred to here is the one that runs on the provider s side and not the Quadro s personal DHCP server The Assign Manually radio button switches to the manual adjustment of IP settings This selection requests the following parameters IP Address requires the IP address for the Quadro WAN interface Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask for the Quadro device WAN interface Default Gateway requires the IP address of the router where all packets are to be sent to for example to the router of the provider The WAN Interface Configuration page may be used to modify the MAC address of the Quadro This might be necessary if the ISP Internet Service Provider requires a specified MAC address for example for authentication This page offers the following components MAC Address Assignment manipulation radio buttons e This Device turns to the default MAC address of the Quadro e User Defined requires user defined MAC Address The MTU drop down list allows you to select the ma
194. istics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls pages consist of the general information on successful missed and unsuccessful calls search fields and the calls table The search components are as follows From and To text fields are used to search by date and time The data must be entered in either of the following formats dd mm yyyy hh mm ss or dd Mon yyyy hh mm ss The time criteria are optional From requires an earlier date and time than the To field If the entered data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal date should be less than maximal date prevents statistics filtering From and To drop down lists are used to search by duration The duration has to be selected from the list of values From field must indicate a shorter duration than the To field If the inserted data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal duration should be less than maximal duration prevents statistics filtering Calling Phone and Called Phone respectively require the caller and called party s SIP address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly extension or PSTN number as search criteria Wildcard symbols are allowed here The Call Statistics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls tables are lists of successful missed and unsuccessful incoming and outgoing calls and their parameters Call Start Time Call Duration Call destinations Each column heading in
195. istration Status table includes the following information that may be sorted in ascending or descending order clicking the columns headlines The IP Lines Registration Status displays a table with the IP Lines registration information on the Quadro The Registered IP Lines table lists the IP lines and remote extensions registered on the Quadro as well as all SLA lines registered from each IP phone The table indicates the actual IP addresses of the remote devices the usernames by which the devices have been registered on the Quadro as well as the registration status information Fig 11 24 IP Lines Registration Status page License Status The License Status page displays a table with all available licenses on the Quadro and the corresponding settings for each license Currently only QCM license status is displayed Main System Uawa Telephony internet pink Mete Coys iceman This page includes the following information Quadro Status License Status Type indicates the type of the license available on the Quadro conve inoran Count indicates the number of the corresponding licenses available on ee ocuuicense 10 the Quadro In Use indicates the number of used licensed from the total available licenses Extension lists the extensions that are using the corresponding license Links in this column move to the corresponding service configuration page for the extension Fig 11 25 License Status page Quadro4Li SW V
196. it becomes available on the server With this selection on the indicated weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the server will automatically download and install it on the Quadro The Check Update Now button is used to manually initiate Check and notify or Check and update actions The action to be executed depends on the radio button selected above Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x C epygi Q4Li109 Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Automatic Firmware Update Info Feedback will be given via the event system Enable Automatically Firmware Update Server Configuration Assign manually Server Name ftp epygi corn Server Port 21 Update Method ftp UserName admin Password ee O Assign automatically via DHCP Getthe TFTP server value from DHCP server This requires Quadro to be configured as DHCP client also the DHCP server should be configured to provide the TFTP server name parameter option 66 Check for updates Check andnotiy EveyDay Y at 000 Y Check and update Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 34 Upload Configuration page 22 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Legible Configuration Management Administrator s Menus The Legible Configuration Management is used to manually manage the configuration on the Quadro This wi
197. ived Drop Errors e Transmitted Drop Errors Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved e Received Overrun Errors e Transmitted Carrier Errors e Received MultiCast Packets a Transmitted Collisions Fig Il 14 Quadro Status Network Status page When opening the corresponding interface statistics window no traffic values are displayed at first After opening the window the tables will serve as a counter and traffic statistics will be updated every minute DNS Server Alternative DNS Server and Default Gateway these display the Quadro settings corresponding to what has been configured with the System Configuration Wizard Services NTP Server and Client DHCP Server and Client DNS Firewall NAT PPP IDS statuses shows if they have stopped or if they are still running The View VPN Status link refers to the VPN Configuration page where all VPN IPSec PPTP and L2TP connections can be viewed and edited Transfer Statistics link to the Transfer Statistics page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 13 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Transfer Statistics page shows a user defined statistics table with the transmit receive value criteria interface type A 3 Cepygi and time period It contains the following components Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network fa quadro Time range of statistic table the drop down list includes the perio
198. k on the board and refers to the page where ISDN trunk and traffic statistics can be viewed The ISDN Trunk Status page provides the following information about the selected trunk state May stem Unies Takipi ead oa pik Ligeia Ha ead le ISDN Status Trunk 1 Link displays the ISDN link state up or down Frame Synchronization displays the signal synchronization state in the trunk Yes or No HDLC Receive shows the number of packets received in HDLC High level Data Link Control format HDLC CRC Error shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check errors HDLC Packet Abort displays the number of received aborted packets HDLC Transmit displays the number of packets transmitted in HDLC format HDLC Octet Count displays the number of error packets received in HDLC format The following SDN BRI Layer 2 statistics are displayed for received and transmitted packets TEI value shows the actual TEI value L2 State shows the actual BRI L2 state Information Frame shows the number of signaling packets for call initiation and termination Receive Ready displays the number of controlling packets while the ISDN link is up Receive Not Ready displays the number of controlling packets in case of inability to accept calls by destination f i Fig 11 127 ISDN Trunk Status page SABME shows the number of packets upon connection establishment Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 70 Quadro4Li Manual Il
199. key system It has to be available on both sides of the IPSec connection and will generate a different pair of keys on each side a private key and a public key During the connection establishment some data is encrypted with the remote party s public key They can be decrypting the data with their private key and the data encrypted there with Quadro s public key can be decrypted with Quadro s private key Since the private key is never transmitted it stays completely unknown to everyone thus the system remains safe Even if someone gets the public key decryption cannot be possible without the private key Quadro generates such a pair of keys automatically when it is set up The user cannot see the private key but must know the public key because their IPSec connection partner will need it Please Note A pair of keys will always be generated a public one and a private one The previously generated pair of keys will become invalid as well as all existing IPSec connections that use RSA keying The IPSec Configuration link refers to the IPSec Connection Settings page This page provides an overview of all existing IPSec connections characterized by their Connection Name the Remote Gateway the IP address or the hostname of the IPSec connection partner the State of the IPSec connection Stopped Connecting Activated Waiting or Connected and the dedicated Keying Type the encryption type The content of the table can be sorted in ascending or de
200. l Routing and extension settings Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus eae Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep 81 quadrom System Security Management System Security Settings System Security Diagnostics Start Security Audit Start security audit Checking Firewall done IP Lines done Call Routing done Extensions done Users done Settings do not correspond to selected security level You can view the complete report by clicking the Show the latest security report link below m Show the latest security report from 22 Nov 2010 12 20 Useful links to adjust system security User Rights Management IP Line Settings Firewall NAT Epygi treats system security with the utmost priority and has taken an active approach to provide users with information and tools to aid in maintaining system security Itis highly recommended that users of an IP based system need to be familiar with industry best practices to maintain system security Limitation of Liability and Remedies In no event shall Epygi Technologies be liable for any consequential incidental direct indirect special punitive or other damages including without limitation loss of data loss of phone calls loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use or inability to use the Quadro Back
201. l show solid light busy on all other IP phones To make an external call through the certain SLA line the programmable key assigned to that SLA line should be in the idle state The IP phone user should then push the corresponding programmable key depending on what line he needs to get and wait for a dial tone Once the dial tone is heard user can dial the number and the push the OK Dial button on his IP phone The call will be placed through the corresponding SLA line During the call the programmable keys assigned to that SLA line on all other IP phones goes to the state ON indicating that the line is busy Please Note If the IP phone is configured through the Plug and Play option while connecting to the Quadro the first few programmable keys on the IP phone will be by default assigned to the first SLA lines on the Quadro in the consequent order The Key System Emulation page is used to configure and setup the Shared Line Appearance SLA lines on the Quadro The available SLA lines and their configuration parameters are listed in the table on this page The Quadro4Li product has 8 SLA lines y l epygl Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network TlO Q4Li109 Key System Emulation Line External Trunk Advanced Settings SLA1 inactive orwarding for SLA inactive orwarding for SLA2 Inactive onvarding for SLA3 inactive orwardina for SLA inactive onvarding for SLAS Inactive onvarding for SLAG inactive orwardin
202. l the deletion by pressing on No To Delete a Group 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Check the one or more checkboxes of the corresponding groups that should be deleted from the groups table Press Select all if all groups should be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cancel the deletion by pressing on No IDS Log The IDS logging page contains information about dropped packets and the senders responsible for those packets IDS discards dangerous packets or packets including intrusion attacks It generates a table with the IDS log report The administrator can be notified about newly logged entries in various ways mail display notification and Flashing LEDs depending on the settings in the Event Settings page To make an IDS log reporting table IDS needs to be enabled on the IDS Log page The IDS Logs table is a list of new or read IDS entries and descriptions referring to them The table provides a status row that has the value New if the entry is still unread or it is empty if the entry has already been read Mark All as Read marks all IDS logged entries as read and removes the New status from the Status row of the IDS entries table Delete Log is used to delete all entries from the IDS table A detailed log of the selected entry can be seen by clicking on the De
203. lable When this checkbox is not selected Quadro keeps its Layer1 always active This checkbox enables the Enable TEI Remove Procedure and Permanent TEI Value checkboxes With the Enable TEI Remove Procedure checkbox is selected the trunk will lose the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 With the Permanent TEI Value checkbox is selected the trunk will keep the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 or when Quadro detected ISDN link DOWN signal from carrier Please Note The Passive Mode Enable TEI Remove Procedure and Permanent TEI Value checkboxes are present only for connection types different from PTP Point to Point selected on the first page of ISDN Wizard If PTP Point to Point connection type is selected on the first page of the ISDN Wizard these three checkboxes are replaced with a TEI Address text field that requires the channel number digit values from 0 to 63 for connection establishment between the CO and the ISDN client Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 69 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Channel Selection is used to select between the Preferred and Exclusive B channel selection methods For Preferred channel selection the CO answers to the call request by the first available timeslot With the Exclusive channel selection the CO should feedback only by the timeslot asked in the call request The Bearer Establishment Procedure drop down list allows select
204. le key does Please Note When saving changes on this page the system asks for a confirmation to remotely reboot the IP phone It is recommended to reboot the IP phone after configuration changes on this page in order to make the new configuration effective on the IP phone Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 66 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ISDN Settings The Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is distinguished by digital telephony and data transport services offered by regional telephone carriers ISDN involves the digitization of the telephone network which permits voice data text graphics music video and other source material to be transmitted over existing telephone wires The ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI service offers two B channels voice transfer and one D channel signaling data transfer The BRI B channel service operates at 64 kbit s and is meant to carry user data The BRI D channel service operates at 16 kbit s and is meant to carry control and signaling information although it can support user data transmission under certain circumstances The ISDN service allows Quadro act as a user or as a network If connected to a private PBX the Quadro should be configured in the network mode If an ISDN trunk from the CO Central Office is connected to the Quadro it should be configured as a user Quadro supports the MSN Multiple Subscriber Number service i e it can be subscribed to mul
205. lease note If both of the above checkboxes are disabled no FAX transmission to the peer s voice mailbox will be possible Enable Pass Through Modem checkbox is only available for Auto Attendant and extensions attached to the FXS lines it is not available for extensions attached to the IP line This checkbox enables the modem tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the data transmission from to the modem attached to the line During data transmission Silence Suppression see RIP Settings and Echo Cancellation are being disabled on the line Please note If the extension attendant is intended to accept modem connections disable the Enable T 38 FAX checkbox to allow the system to identify the modem tones correctly Otherwise the modem connection may fail The Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls checkbox enables the usage of your own preferred codecs if available on both peers for the IP connection establishment on the extension Call Park Service Call Park service is used to store a call on a specific number so that any other user on the system can retrieve it For example a user receives a call but wants to take it in a conference room where it is possible to speak privately Transferring the call to the conference room is not an option because the conference room it is transferred to might be in use or the user is unable to walk to the conference room in time to answer the call The user can use Call Park to place the call at a
206. lected Service the set Action allowed or blocked the IP addresses the filters apply to if Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding With the exception of View All the table offers the following functional buttons Enable is used to enable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear Disable is used to disable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear Add opens a filter specific page where new rules may be defined by a Service an Action a Restriction to certain IP address es or IP groups and if adding a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding the destination IP address for Forwarding The page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding offers the following input options Service includes a list of possible services to be configured All user defined services also will be displayed in this list Action includes possible actions to setup the rule Forward to IP requires the destination IP address where traffic should be transferred to if it comes from the restricted host The IP address defined in this field will be ignored for blocked action of the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding rule Note It is not allowed to forward incoming packets when the NAT service is disabled on the Quadro Port Translation text field is available for Allowed action only and op
207. ler ID Based Services for SIP 1920287 sip epygl com Extension 11 mEgMming Call po Pi Col eckig r AA Upload Hew Blocking Massage File 1 EDH Sree Send Message lo Lallor Party Erorct this rty O Rsstont Dirau Sotiri Message Filo Commesivkdecking way Dive Fig 11 200 Blocking Page for the Administrator 109 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Voice Mail Profiles Main Voice Mail Your Extension Supplementary Services cp 9l quadro When the administrator accesses the Voice Mail Settings of an extension there is an additional Voice Mail Profiles link present that leads to the page where custom voice mail profiles and their settings can be defined This link is hidden Extension 11 for the extension user s access The Voice Mail Profiles page is used to define and configure custom voice mail profiles Voice Mail Settings Maximum mail message duration min 5 l i oe Ask password before granting local access to mail box Voice Mail Indication The Voice Mail Profile is a group of most common Voice Mail eee igi Ask password before granting remote access to mail box iv Lamp indicatio Settings which can be saved under a specific name This Dg allows you to have several versions of Voice Mail Settings Send welcome message a Tone Inet configurations per extension V Play Voice Mail help Ringing indication Automatically play messages ing
208. lic additionally enables a read write access on the Quadro for the SNMP monitoring application With this checkbox enabled administrator will be able to remotely configure the Quadro via SNMP v1 2c Read Write Community private SNMP administrating program SNMP v1 v2c Read Write Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read write management like gathering information events statistics etc about Quadro s and remotely changing Quadro s configuration Field may contain some kind of password which Copyright c 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management The Service Restart button restarts the SNMP sub system on the Quadro Restarting the SNMP sub system is recommended if it does not respond to a SNMP manager s requests Enable SNMP v1 2c Read Write Access Fig 11 50 Global SNMP Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 30 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide SNMP Trap Settings are used to define the traphosts that should be informed when certain events occur on the Quadro For the listed traphosts to be informed about the events on the Quadro Send SNMP Trap action should be configured for the corresponding event s from the Events page SNMP Trap Settings page contains a list of all configured traphosts with the referring information
209. ll allow you to download a piece of configuration from the Quadro in the way of legible file to make necessary changes in that file and to upload it back to the same or different Quadro s With this service some pieces of configuration like extension settings NAT settings etc of one Quadro can be used on another Quadro This also helps to apply the same group of settings to the several instances for example to apply the same SIP settings to multiple extensions on the Quadro on the same or different Quadros avoiding manual configuration of each of those instances i e extension from the web management on each of the Quadros The Quadro reseller distributor ISP or carrier usually uses this service The Download current configuration in a legible format link refers to the Configuration Summary page where a partial or complete configuration can be defined and downloaded or viewed The Configuration Summary page is used to generate a piece of legible configuration and to download it to a PC or to view it directly in the browser This page consists of the following components The CGI Description drop down list includes a list of Web management pages for which the legible configuration can be manually managed For example selecting RTP Settings Web management page will generate a legible configuration file with parameters present on the RTP Settings page The Generate for Extension drop down list allows you to limit the settings in the
210. lls over IP are implemented based on Session Initiating Protocol SIP on the Quadro When making a call to a destination that is somewhere on the Internet a SIP address must be provided SIP addresses needs to be specified in one of the following formats The display name and the port number are optional parameters in the SIP address If a port is not specified 5060 will be set up as the default display name lt username ipaddress port gt one The range of valid ports is between 1024 and 65536 display name lt username ipaddress gt A flexible structure of wildcards is allowed In comparison with a ee i wildcard the character stands for only one unknown digit and the username character stands for any number of any digits For your convenience the following combinations can be used Please Note Wildcards are available for caller addresses only No 2 E wildcard characters are allowed for called party addresses Exceptions e ipaddress any user from the specified SIP server are addresses in the Supplementary Addresses table that are used by e username a specified user from any SIP server Outgoing Call Blocking and Hiding Caller Information Settings Te H a services To use and alone as non wildcard characters use e any user from any SIP server and 1 correspondingly Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 6 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Me
211. lly go off hook by automatic activation of the phone s speaker once the call to the paging group comes in Add functional button opens an Add Entry page with an only drop down list containing all available extensions on the Quadro Fig Il 82 Paging Group of Extension page The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for users to use the Paging Group service can be defined Malo Syria Users Telephony Internet Network Access List of Extension 67 Add Gili Delbes Select al lines Selection The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to use the Paging Group through the corresponding extension Fig 11 83 Access List of Extension page for Paging group The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created Main System Users Telephony internat Uplink Matwork This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the available call types Access List Add Entry e PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions ute aP E e SIP calls through a SIP server inin ditiis no SIP Clipboard e PSTN calls from global telephone network acto aE e Auto used for undefined call types The destination im independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP MECANO a iia address or PSTN number will be parsed through Call Fig Il 84 Access List of Extension Add
212. load Greeting File appears only if a file has been previously uploaded The link is used to download the audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Logout This option is used to close the session between the user PC and Quadro and to leave the Quadro Web Management or to enter the management with another login By selecting the Logout button the startup page will be displayed and the user needs to login again Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 112 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator The following PBX Services are accessible at the dial tone characterized by beginning with the key O Administrator Login Administrator s Manual Quadro s Call Codes Allows to modify Auto Attendant greeting and menu messages as well as to manage universal extension messages Enabling disabling the Call Routing rules 900 Allows managing the routing entries in the Call Routing table e to enable disable certain dialing rules by dialing key combinations pre configured on each routing entry By dialing 000 you will be required to dial enabler disabler key to enable or disable the routing rule s correspondingly Since multiple routing rules may have the same enabler disabler key combinations the same key may be used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one dialing the certain key will affect all pre configured routing rul
213. lowing to route SIP calls back and forth A Quadro can be at the same time configured both as a slave and as a master to the same remote device i e the slave Quadro can act as a master for the master device it is registered on For example the Quadro1 can act as a slave for the Quadro2 In its turn the Quadro2 can act as a slave for the Quadro1 With this configuration and the corresponding routing rules added in the Call Routing table on both devices the SIP calls will be routed from Quadro1 to Quadro2 and vice versa The SIP Tunnel Settings page is used to enable the Quadro as a slave or master device for SIP tunneling The page consists of the following components The Enable Tunnels to Slave Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a master device and allows you to configure the SIP tunnels to the slave Quadros When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Slave Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Slave Devices moves you to the page where a list of slave devices needs to be defined The Tunnels to Slave Devices page consists of a table where slave devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new slave device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The SIP Tunnel Name text field requires the tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel n
214. main management window that serves to switch the Internet connection on off When accessing the Internet every station of the connected LAN has to connect to Quadro first Always connected Quadro stays in the always connected mode This will allow always being online in the network IP Address Assignment radio buttons are used to define the IP address assignment for the PPP interface with the following options Dynamic IP Address the IP address to the PPP interface will be assigned dynamically by the DHCP server Fixed IP Address the fixed user defined IP address will be assigned to the PPP interface following PPP PPTP Settings The Keep Connection alive checkbox enables keeping the connection alive by sending control packets dedicated for the link state verification Advanced PPP Settings Man System Users Telephony internet Uplir Network Fig 11 158 PPP Dial Settings page The Advanced PPP Settings are used to enable disable certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment These settings are available only if Quadro has a PPPoE WAN interface Attention Disabling any of the services below may cause problems when establishing a connection including the complete connection failure The default settings should be changed only if the ISP Internet Service Provider specifically requires it or if the peer system has problems with one of the services listed below More information about t
215. messages and voice mails in the voice mailbox The device will be rebooted You will not be automatically redirected to the login page so you need to access it manually again when reboot ends After the reboot the Change Extension Length page will disappear and the Extensions Management page will be displayed The Change Extension Length page will not appear again unless the default configuration settings are restored on the device Two types of user extensions active and inactive can be created on the Quadro Active extensions are those that are attached to a line can place and receive calls and use available telephony services Inactive extensions are those that are not attached to the line They can use some available telephony services but they cannot place and receive calls Instead inactive extensions have a voice mailbox available to store the messages from callers Quadro4Li has no FXS lines only IP lines are available Attendant extensions are dedicated to the IVR system on the Quadro These extensions are used by callers to reach Quadro s users and use the remote access and call relay services It is possible to create Auto Attendants with the custom scenarios By default Quadro has one Auto Attendant extension 00 which is undeletable Attention The system is limited to 100 extensions Once the number of extensions in the Extensions table reaches 100 there will be no more possibility to add new extensions The Extensions table i
216. ming SIP calls Quadro will Call Routing directly look for a matching routing rule in Call Routing table and will ignore the possible matches in the Extensions Management table The Call Routing Table link leads to the Call Routing table where routing patterns may be manually defined The Local AAA Table link leads to the page where local AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting database can be Fig Il 134 Call Routing page managed Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 73 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus s z J Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network e E Pyg ys l ae Call Routing Table Show Detailed View gt gt gt Detailed View gt gt gt Hide disabled records disabled records Enable Disable Add Edit Duplicate Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Move Up Move Down Move To attern Failover Local Inbound Pattern o ae Panem E Modification Call Settings Reason s Authentication Modification Inbound Settings al pues UES ISDN E cias lacio trunk Any Port User st Enabled 99 NDS 1 ISDN trunk Any Port User EOI CO Pe IC SI p de Ep TP Enabled 7 NDS 1 ne n None URF O PU A A A O A TU CE NN VENIR IEEE la lt gt NDS NumberofDiscarded Symbols UES Use Extension Settings ML Multiple Logons URP Use RTP Proxy AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting DT Date Time Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Techn
217. n Malas manage the Local Administrators account The following Cane Password Enable User Disable Use functional buttons are available on this page The Change Password functional button is used to change the password of the Administrator and Local Administrator user s account Select one of the available users in the table by toggling the corresponding checkbox and press Change Password to open the corresponding page Fig Il 60 Users page at User Rights Management The Change Password page is used to change the user s password The GUI Access Password offers the following components ii Ca il at ili Change Password Account Name admin The Old Password text field is only present when IO modifying the Administrator account password and requires A the current password of the Administrator An error message prevents entering the wrong password ARPANI The New Password text field requires a new password for the Administrator or Local Administrator Reentering the new password in the Confirm New Password text field will confirm the new password Fig Il 61 Change Password page Please note The password can consist of numeric values and symbols Up to twenty 0 20 digits and symbols are allowed The Phone Access Password offers the following components The Old Password text field is present when modifying the Administrator account password and requires the current password of the Administrator An err
218. n is measured The minimum and maximum round trip time and its average as well as the percentage of lost and of received frames results are displayed in the lower area of the page 192 160 0 26 Pra j l sip eirplbim Traceroute Traceroute checks the Internet connection by triggering the routers hops that are passed to reach the destination specified in the Traceroute Target text field Trace routing gives feedback on the routers passed by packets on the way toward the destination and the round trip delay of packets to these routers Attention No Traceroute is possible if a high priority Firewall has been enabled see chapter Firewall and NAT Fig 11 49 Networking Tools page For the purpose of tracerouting several IP packets are sent out UDP User Datagram Protocol is used to send packets and ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is used to receive information about the routers In their headers the TTL Time To Live value increases from 1 to 30 When the first IP frame is received by the first router its IP address will be returned in its acknowledgement Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 29 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The second frame delivers the IP address of the second router and so on and so forth The results of Traceroute are displayed on the lower area of the page Ping Target requires the destination IP address or host name for the ICMP request The Ping button starts
219. n is configured to handle incoming calls on the Quadro Once the incoming call occurs Quadro is trying to transfer the call to the call controlling application If the call controlling application does not response within the mentioned timeout Quadro will answer the call or perform an action configured for unanswered incoming calls This setting is dependent on the network conditions therefore consult with your network administrator before changing the default value The read only Feature Key text field indicates whether the feature key for the 3PCC Support is installed on the system The system will not accept connections from 3PCC applications if no key is found The 3PCC support is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page The read only WAN Port text field indicates whether there is a filtering rule specified for the Call Control Access If a third party call control application connects to the Quadro from the WAN interface a filtering rule for the corresponding host should be created on the Call Control Access page to allow the application a remote access Creating a filtering rule is not required if the firewall is not setup on the Quadro The field shows Opened if there is at least one enabled filtering rule for the Call Control Access Key System Emulation The Key System Emulation is a widely used service in legacy PBXs simplifying the direct connection to the available PSTN lines On the Quadro the usag
220. n on the new host The value should be in the range of 10 to 3600 Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Telephony BAe met Ud NAT Traversal Settings RIP Pa aneters Fig 11 114 RTP Parameters page Mam System Users Telephony Peet mel Udri Metwork NAT Traversal Settings STUN Por aeneters Fig 11 115 STUN Parameters page The NAT Exclusion Table page includes a table where all possible IP ranges are listed that allows you to exclude some network addresses from being NATed For example if a Quadro user needs to make SIP calls within the local network as well as outside of that network all local IP addresses are required to be excluded from NAT traversal settings by being listed in this table Otherwise a malfunction may occur in SIP operations The NAT Exclusion Table page offers the following input options Each record in the table has a corresponding checkbox assigned to its row The checkbox is used to delete or to edit the corresponding record Only one record may be edited at a time An error message will appear if no selection is made or more than one is selected Each column heading in the table is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The Add Entry page includes the following text fields Add opens the Add Entry page where a new IP range can be added
221. n the table Main System Users Telephony Imernet Uplink Network Cc SI Extensions Directory Settings Add Entry Add opens the Add Entry page where a new name may be assigned to the extension An error message appears and prevents adding a new entry to the Extensions Directory if no extensions are available in the Extensions Management table The Add Entry page offers the following components Fig Il 99 Extensions Directory Add Entry page Name requires the name of the extension owner Several extensions can have the same name and a single extension may have several names Users Name is the identification parameter being searched within the Extensions Directory You should use uppercases letters in this field otherwise the name will automatically be changed to uppercase when saving it to the Extensions Directory table Call to drop down list contains all extensions on the Quadro that should ring when selecting the specified Name Description can be used for any optional information requiring entry in the Extensions Directory Please Note The entries in the Extensions Directory can automatically be deleted if the extensions assigned to the entries are removed from the Extensions Management table Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database page is used to create a list of trusted external phones If they are part of the Quadro Authorized Phones database external SIP or PSTN then users are free to access the Q
222. n the Fig 11 189 DNS Server Settings page Quadro s LAN to be resolves through the DNS server Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 105 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Mam System Users Telephony baernoet Uplc Netwoth DNS Server Settings Add Host 10 15 196 iP Clpboard Add functional link opens the page Add Host where a list of aliased can be defined for the certain device in the Quadro s LAN The page contains the following components IP Address text fields require the IP address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in the Quadro s LAN Alias text fields are used to enter up to 5 alias names by which f f i i Fig Il 190 DNS Server Settings Add Host page the device in the Quadro s LAN will be resolved 2 pag DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface The DHCP Settings page provides the option of enabling a DHCP server and controlling the Quadro user s LAN settings Therefore Quadro LAN users will automatically be provided with the following settings using the configured parameters e P addresses NTP corresponds to the Quadro s IP address WINS server Nameserver corresponds to the Quadro s IP address Domain name Mane yen Conference Managemen biernej Upelinik Hetek The DHCP Settings page offers the following input options Enable DHCP Server checkbox activates the DHCP server on Quadro With this checkbox enabled Quadro will be able El t
223. n the Pattern and Inbound Caller Pattern text fields of the Call Routing Wizard Characters 0 a A 9 Z 8 1 GLI Please Note The symbols and should be prefixed with a slash if they are used as ordinary characters otherwise the system will interpret them as wildcards Please Note The symbols and are used to define a range of characters and cannot be used as ordinary characters Wildcards i Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Any number of any characters Any single character A character or a string from the specified set of characters and strings The following control symbols are used to specify a set Use a comma to separate the elements of a set Please Note No spaces are allowed within braces Example The pattern is 9 1 3 11 a Numbers matching the pattern are 91 93 911 Ya Use a minus sign to specify a range of characters Each successive element of the range is obtained by increasing the previous element the element code by one Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2145 2155 2a5 2b5 2c5 2d5 Use an exclamation point to exclude a character or a string from a set Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 14 c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2155 2a5 2b5 2d5 Please Note You can use the wildcard within the braces but not Thus 12 104 15 367
224. nd enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of Texas without regard to choice of law provisions that would cause the application of the law of another jurisdiction Attorneys Fees In the event of any litigation or other dispute arising as a result of or by reason of this Agreement the prevailing party in any such litigation or other dispute shall be entitled to in addition to any other damages assessed its reasonable attorneys fees and all other costs and expenses incurred in connection with settling or resolving such dispute If you have any questions about this Agreement please write to Epygi at 6900 North Dallas Parkway Suite 850 Plano Texas 75024 or call Epygi at 972 692 1166 Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 121
225. ndicated in this text field the call will be automatically redirected to the defined destination e Call Type drop down list includes possible incoming call types PBX PSTN SIP or Auto PBX selection means that the call will be redirected to the local extension SIP selection means that the call will be redirected to the SIP destination correspondingly PSTN selection means that the call will be redirected to the PSTN destination Auto selection is used for undefined call types destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing need lauaaring war Esa Call To text field requires the destination number dialed in the format depending on the selected Call Type The wildcard is supported in this field e Attendant Welcome Message this group allows updating the active Auto Attendant welcome message played only once when entering Auto Attendant downloading it to the ie PC or restoring the default one The group offers the Fig Il 86 Extensions Management Edit Entry Attendant Scenario page following components Enable Welcome Message checkbox is used to enable disable the Auto Attendant welcome message the default one or the custom one uploaded from this page or recorded from the handset see Feature Codes being played when callers enter Quadro s Auto Attendant Upload new welcome message indicates the file name used to upload a new welcome message The uploa
226. ne ae The Use DID for outgoing calls indicates whether the specified DID number should be included in the Caller ID of calls initiated from the SLA If this checkbox is enabled the DID number will be sent along with the SIP username This f cspyrigrtec 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved checkbox should be enabled if the IP PSTN provider authorizes the users by their DIDs The Forwarding for SLA links in the Advanced Settings column refer to the Advanced Settings for SLA page where the unconditional or no answer call forwarding can be configured for each SLA line The Advanced Settings for SLA page is used to configure the unconditional or no answer call forwarding for each When the forwarding is enabled all incoming calls to the corresponding SLA line will be redirected to the defined destination If the call forwarding is activated the programmable key assigned to the corresponding SLA line will remain in the ON state until the call is disconnected Use DID for outgoing calls Fig 11 150 Key System Emulation SLA page The following ways of Call Forwarding are available for the SLA lines Unconditional all incoming calls to the corresponding SLA line will be forwarded to the specified destinations No Answer incoming calls will be forwarded to the specified destinations if the corresponding SLA line is not answered within 20 seconds The Enable Service checkbox selection on the related page activates corre
227. ned recipients Mails will be automatically converted to the Windows PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format before being attached to the e mail Checkbox activates the following input options e Email Address requires the mailing address s of the person s that should to receive the newly arrived voice mails on their email accounts Use a space or a comma to separate the mailing addresses in the text field e The next two fields are used for retransmission of voice mails via email Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the voice mail will be delivered via email to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the voice mail is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field e Remove Voice Mail on send removes the voice mail from the user mailbox after sending it to the email recipient s e Remove Fax On Send removes the fax attachment from the user mailbox after sending it to the email recipient s Main Voice Mal Your Extension Supplementary Services Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry Extension 11 Profile Name VMS for Office Administrator s Menus Fig 11 203 Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry page Main Voice a Tour Extension Supplementary Servite Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry Extension 11 Len mail message duran min 4 Send MEA WEISS messages Ma mii Enable Zers
228. nel the state of the channel enabled or A aisabled Quadro Status Lines Status State the current state of the channel free busy or N A General Information IPLine1 Pline2 P Line3 IP Line 4 IP Line 5 IP Line 6 IPLine 7 IP Line 8 Network Status IP Line9 IPLine10 IP Line 11 IP Line 12 IP Line 13 IP Line 14 IP Line 15 IP Line 16 Dynamic Parameters Lines Status IP Line 17 PLine18 ISDNTrunk1 ISDNTrunk2 ISDNTrunk3 ISDN Trunk 4 Caller Party this parameter appears when a call is Memory Status received and indicates the caller address Hardware Status B1 channel Enabled B2 channel Enabled j istration S State Busy State Free Called Party this parameter appears when a call is are A placed and indicates the destination address acne aik laa 6 Call Duration current call duration in seconds Call duration 5 sec The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics link is only present for local ISDN trunks this option is not available for back shared ISDN trunks and leads to the ISDN Channel Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Usage Statistics page where diagram chart of ISDN channels usage can be viewed The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics offers ISDN Channel Usage Statistic tables depending on the criterion and time period selected Fig 11 18 Line Status Lines Status page Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep y 81 The Trunk checkboxes are only present when there is ii more than
229. new Group with Members To add a group with the given parameters press Save Seo re SS assign it to the currently selected group go To Delete a Member Administrator s Menus Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link on the Filtering Rules page Click on the Add button on the IP Pool Configuration page A page where a new group may be added will appear in the browser window Define a group name in the Group Name text field and fill in the Group Description if needed Open the IP Pool Group Configuration page by clicking on the group name Select the Add button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page A page opens where new members may be added to the group Enter an IP address for the member in the IP Address text fields select a IP subnet or IP group from the User defined Group drop down list to Enter a Member Description in the corresponding text field if needed To add a member with these parameters to the selected group press Save 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Click on the desired members that should be deleted The IP Pool Group Configuration list will appear 3 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding members that should be deleted from the Members table Press Select all if all members should be deleted 4 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page 5 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cance
230. ns Once the patterns are prioritized the pattern with the highest priority will be used as a preferred route for call setup The successive patterns will be used only if the destination specified by a higher priority pattern is unreachable To prioritize the matching patterns the following criteria are sequentially applied to matching patterns The criteria are ordered by their priorities Each consecutive criterion is calculated only for the patterns that take the same value for the preceding criteria that is Criterion 3 is calculated only for patterns that take the same value for Criterion 1 and Criterion 2 Criterion 1 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 Criterion 4 Criterion 5 Criterion 6 Criterion 7 Criterion 8 Criterion 9 Criterion 10 Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x The presence of asterisks in a pattern The patterns without have a higher priority The total number of matching digits symbols inside and outside the braces brackets The more matching digits a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of matching digits symbols outside the braces brackets The more matching digits outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please Note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 2 The total number of question marks inside and outside the braces brackets The more question marks a pattern contains the hig
231. nt With the Enable FAX Forwarding checkbox enabled the system moves the incoming FAX to the selected extension if a FAX tone is detected on the Auto Attendant Fig 11 85 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for Auto Attendant page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 45 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Extension to forward drop down list is used to choose the extension where the incoming FAX addressed to the Quadro s Auto Attendant will be forwarded The list contains only those extensions that have FAX support enabled FAX support can be enabled from the Extension Codecs page Please Note FAX forwarding is applicable only for incoming calls from PSTN and IP networks It is not valid for PBX calls With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding auto attendant extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if this auto attendant extension is reserved or not used The Percentage of System Memory drop down list is used to define the space for the Auto Attendant s system messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available s
232. nt Settings page contains the Enable RADIUS Client checkbox that enables RADIUS client on the Quadro Please Note The RADIUS Client cannot be disabled if there is at least one route with RADIUS Authentication and Authorization or RADIUS Accounting values configured in the AAA Required drop down list at the Call Routing table In order to be able to disable the RADIUS Client on the Quadro appropriate routes should be removed first The other RADIUS Client settings are divided into three groups 1 Registration Settings The Primary Server requires the IP address of the primary Radius Server The Secondary Server requires the IP address of the secondary Radius Server NAT Station IP text fields require the NAT PC WAN IP address If no NAT Station is specified here Quadro s IP address will be sent to the RADIUS server Secret Key is used to insert the secret key between the Radius client and the server Contact the Radius server administrator to get the secret key for your Quadro The Confirm Secret Key field is used to verify the secret key If the entered Secret Key does not correspond to the one in the Confirm Secret Key field the error message The Secret Key does not match Please try again will appear Retry Count allows you to select the number of attempts authorized before canceling the registration Main System Users Telephony lena pink Network RADIUS Client Settings Enable Re Receive Timeout allows you to sel
233. nt when a RADIUS client is enabled With this checkbox selected callers will need to pass the authentication through RADIUS server see above when dialing the current pattern e The RADIUS Accounting checkbox is accessible when the RADIUS Client is enabled With this checkbox selected no authentication will take place but CDRs call detail reports of the calls made through this routing record will be sent to the RADIUS server This checkbox selection enables the Client Code Identification checkbox If the authentication is configured based on the callers address callers will pass the authentication automatically otherwise they will be required to identify themselves by a username and a password e The Client Code Identification checkbox selection activates the code identification feature a caller after dialing the destination phone number may optionally enter and then an Identity Code An Identity Code is an arbitrary digit string entered by the user to identify a specific call or call group The Identity Code is sent with CDR to the RADIUS server and might be used by a billing program for grouping the calls having the same Identity Code The Check with 3PCC checkbox is used to request a 3PCC approval before placing a call with the specific routing rule When this checkbox is selected and the corresponding routing rule is used to place a call Quadro sends a request to the call controlling application for the managing person to accept or
234. ntification username for accounting purposes When no username is specified in this field the source username will be used for accounting The Send Accounting messages manipulation radio buttons group is used to select sending both Start and Stop accounting messages or only Stop accounting message Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 85 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Voice Mail Recording Codec The Voice Mail Recording Codec page is used to configure the codec for the Voice Mail recording Main System Users Talaphony Interest Liplink Harek This page offers the following components Voice Mail Recording Codec The Recording Codec drop down list contains the existing codecs for voice mail compression Changing the Voice Mail recording codec will directly affect the allocated memory size for users Recording Cobac 6 1444 L 3ALELP speech coding a 8 kius rate Lope 6 2006 Carai Tedoen Los All ri Fig 11 146 Voice Mail Coming Settings page Dial Plan Settings The Dial Plan Settings page is used to adjust the dialing timeout setting Main System Users Telephony imermel Uplink Blatwark The Routing Dial Timeout setting specifies a period of time after the last dialed digit that the system identifies as a completion of dialing If the user does not press any key within the specified timeout the system assumes that the dialing is complete and starts calling the dialed number Only prede
235. nus Administrator s Menus System Menu Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network e p y gl System Configuration Wizard q Internet Configuration Wizard Quat System Security Management Active Status System Security Management IP Routing Configuration Call Si Configuration Management e Called Phone Events T uadro Refresh in 589 seconds me Date Settings ail Settings M SMS Settings Firmware Update Boot loader 5 0 3 Release Networking Tools Firmware Version 5 2 24 Release SNMP Settings Diagnostics Features Users currently logged in admin from 172 30 0 111 expires 15 26 Interne Please Copyright c User Rights Management ls reserved Upload Language Pack Fig Il 1 System Menu in Dynamo theme Fig Il 2 System Menu in Plain theme System Configuration Wizard The System Configuration Wizard allows the administrator to define the Quadro s Local Area Network settings and to specify regional configuration settings to make Quadro operational in its LAN The System Configuration Wizard MUST be run upon Quadro s first startup to make sure that it works properly in its network environment The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings e System Configuration see below e DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface e Regional Settings and Preferences see below e Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings see below Main System User
236. nus the DHCP server e Assign manually this selection is used to manually configure the firmware server settings The Server Name the IP address or hostname the Server Port and the Update Method should be defined The Update Method drop down list provides a possibility to choose among TFTP FTP HTTP or HTTPS methods For some of these selections authentication Username and Password can be entered e Assign automatically via DHCP choose this selection if the Quadro acts as a DHCP client in its WAN interface In this case the firmware server s configuration will be automatically obtained from the DHCP server This selection requires previous configuration on the firmware server and will work only if the auto update directory is created on the TFTP server The DHCP server should also be configured to provide the TFTP server name parameter option 66 to the Quadro The second manipulation buttons group on this page allows you to select the frequency of checking for a new update e Check and notify choose this selection if you only wish to be notified about the new available firmware on the server With this selection on the indicated weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the server The way of notification is configured from the Events page e Check and update choose this selection to check and automatically install the new firmware on the Quadro as
237. o assign dynamic IP addresses to the devices in its LAN angert a ff ido IP Cipboard w Mrz 30 a 54 IClipboard Give leases only to hosts listed in the static MAC as 9 PL ES address binding table checkbox enables the DHCP DHCP Advances Seina services only for the devices listed in the table below With this checkbox selected no DHCP services will be provided to the other devices DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Please Note When this checkbox is selected all IP phones configured to use plug and play or auto configuration services see IP Line Settings will keep their IP addresses received from the DHCP server of the Quadro The IP phones that are configured manually should be added to the Special Devices table to keep their IP addressed Help Fig 11 191 DHCP Settings page for LAN interface IP Address Range defines a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to the Quadro LAN users The IP range must be at least 6 otherwise the error message Address Range too small will prevent it from being saved The error message Address Range too large will appear if the IP range is greater than 254 WINS Server defines a WINS server IP address for the Quadro LAN users The DHCP Advanced Settings link leads to the page where the advanced options of the Quadro s DHCP server can be configured The Special Devices table on this page allows you to set a static IP address binding on the MAC address of the device in t
238. o be kept in the queue when being on the line and enables the calls to be answered in the order they have been received This feature can be also used within Receptionist Management see below for more details The Enable checkbox activates the Call Queue functionality on the extension The Call Queue Size text field requires the length of the call queue This is the maximum number of calls that will be accepted into the queue and kept on hold while the extension user is on a Call If a maximum number of calls are already held in the call queue the next incoming call will be routed to the extension s Voice Mail if enabled or will be disconnected Please Note By configuring Call Queue size Call Forwarding if Busy and Voice Mail telephony services will not take effect on the corresponding extension until the call queue is not filled These telephony services will affect only the calls out of the call queue The Max Call Queue Appearance text field requires the maximum number of active calls on the line For example if 1 is configured in this field and the extension is in use the next incoming call will go to the call queue If 2 is configured in this field and extension is in use the next incoming call alert will be heard in the background if Call Waiting service is enabled on the corresponding extension and the extension will hold the first call to answer the second one or they can be joined for a call conference However the nex
239. oaing at 32 how rate packaging the G 726 codewords into octets If you experience 6726 40 ADPCM speech coding at 40 kbit s rate problems with the G 726 voice quality when one of these 67294 CS ACELP speed packaging is selected try a different one e l Use ITU_T specification is selected the ITU 1 366 2 AAL2 type 2 service specific convergence sublayer for narrow band services type packaging of codewords is used where packing code words into octets is starting from the most significant rather than the least significant digit in the octet e f Use IETF RFC is selected the IETF RFC RIP Profile for Audio and Video Conferences with Minimal Control type packaging of codewords is used where packing code lc re words is starting from the least significant position in the Fig 11 110 RTP Settings page octet RTP RTCP Port Range e Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed e Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed Since the specified maximum port has to be higher than the minimum port the error message Min port number should be less than max port number will appear if this condition is not met The port range must consist of digits only otherwise the error Incorrect Port Range only Integer values allowed will appear The difference between Max and Min RT
240. ocol type and port range New services can be used to add a restriction or permission by defining a new filtering rule with the following Add opens the Add New Service page where new services may be added Edit opens the Edit Service page where the service parameters except for the service name can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add New Service page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear The Add page is used to add new services and includes the following text fields and buttons Service Name requires a name for the service that should be added Protocol includes a list of possible protocols to be selected Port Range requires a port range for the defined service To Add a new Service Main System Users Teteptroiry hidettwet Uplink Service Pool Configuration Main Syaani Users Telephony hiba meee Uplink Heawodk service Pool Configuration Add Fig Il 179 Service Pool Page to add a new Service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link on the Filtering Rules page 2 Click on the Add button on the Service Pool Configuration page A page where a new service may be added will appear in the browser window Define a service name in the Service Name text field oe e To add a service with these parameters click on Save To Delete a Service Select the protocol type for the service from
241. ographic strength of any key derived depends in part on the strength of the Diffie Hellman group which is based upon the prime numbers Quadro4Li SW Version ER Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Group 2048 high is stronger more secure than Group 2 medium which is stronger than Group 1 low Group 1 provides 768 bits of keying strength Group 2 provides 1024 bits and Group 2048 provides 2048 bits If mismatched groups are specified on each peer negotiation fails Depending on whether the automatic keying type or the manual one has been selected the button Next will lead you to the Automatic Keying or Manual Keying page The third page of the IPSec Connection wizard Automatic Keying is used to setup a type of password Shared Secret or the RSA public key to secure your IPSec Connection The functionality of Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS can be added to both Following ways of automatic keying are available e Shared Secret is a type of password consisting of any characters that both of the IPSec Connection partners must know The authentication will be done with this shared secret All encryption functions below will remain concealed Please Note It is also not recommended to start multiple road warrior connections with the Shared Secret automatic keying selected For multiple road warriors to be started at the same time it is recommended to use RSA keying with Local ID and Remote ID fields configu
242. oice subsystem The Regional Settings and Preferences page has two drop down lists to select the Location country and a corresponding Timezone Quadro will support Daylight Savings DST correction if it is available for the selected time zone This page also has a manipulation radio button group to choose System Language selection is available only when the custom Language Pack has been uploaded and it is used to enable custom language for system voice messages or returning back to the default language English GUI Theme selection used to select the GUI theme style of the web based configuration pages The Choose Theme on Login checkbox indicates whether the GUI theme selection radio buttons should be displayed on the Quadro Login page Selecting the checkbox will allow users to choose the GUI theme before logging into the Quadro Leaving the checkbox unselected will require the administrator to run the System Configuration Wizard to change the theme The Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings are used to configure the emergency dial plan The Emergency Codes text field requires the PSTN numbers of the emergency or lifeline services Multiple emergency codes separated by commas can be inserted in this field For each emergency code a routing pattern will be generated in the Call Routing Table which will allow faster and easier calls to emergency destinations The PSTN Access Code drop down list allows you to selec
243. ologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig 11 135 Call Routing table brief preview Defining patterns in the Call Routing Table avoids registering Quadro at the routing management server and gives you an option to establish a direct connection to the destination or to use a SIP server for call routing The Call Routing Table lists manually defined routing patterns along with their parameters pattern number state routing and inbound caller settings RTP Proxy and Date Time period settings metric and description as well as automatically created and undeletable patterns created from the System Configuration Wizard The alternating Show Detailed View and Show Brief View buttons are used to display entries in the Call Routing table in detailed and brief views correspondingly The brief view displays the most important settings of the routing rules The detailed view displays all settings of the routing rules as they are configured in the Call Routing Wizard see below The alternating Hide disabled records and Show all records buttons are used to respectively hide or show disabled records in the Call Routing table The system does not consider the disabled records when parsing the table for the call route If the route has an Authentication or an Authenticationg Accounting selected from the AAA Required checkbox group it will have a link to the Users List in the Call Routing table The Users List page contains a list of authorized users define
244. oming SIP calls to Call Routing disabled Call Routing Local Routing table 4 entries defined for PBX SIP PSTN and emergency calls establishment Local AAA Table no entries RADIUS Settings RADIUS client disabled Voice Mail Common Settings Voice Mail Recording G729a Secure Connection disabled Request Timeout 10 NAT Traversal Settings Gain Control Settings SIP Tunnel Settings 3PCC Settings Feature Key not installed WAN port not open Key System Emulation 8 SLA lines inactive Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 117 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Parameter System Default Value Blind transfer to VM disabled Blind transfer to extension disabled Key System Emulation Advanced Configuration RTP RTP Streaming Channels RTP Streaming Channels Reena Unconditional Call Forwarding disabled Advanced Settings for SLAs No Answer Call Forwarding disabled No connections PPTP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 1 0 24 Authentication MSCHAPv2 MPEE 128 bit L2TP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 2 0 24 Dynamic DNS Disabled Firewall disabled Firewall Ping Stealth enabled Fool Portscanner disabled Disabled Disabled CS E Traffic MS File Sharing Blocked for all Filtering Rules SIP Access Allowed for all No user der da services and IP pool groups Time to live TTL 86400 seconds DNS
245. on allows you to upload Attendant s custom scenario file and voice messages The selections are The Upload Scenario File indicates the file name used to upload a new scenario file The uploaded file needs to be in EpygiXML format the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support and is restricted to a 20KB file size Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a custom scenario file Please note You may upload an attendant scenario file along with the voice prompt recordings as a single file To do this create an archive file of the tar gz type containing all the necessary files and upload it from the Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page The View Download Scenario link appears only when a custom scenario file has been previously uploaded and is used to view or download the scenario file The Remove Scenario link is used to remove a custom scenario file and return to the default Auto Attendant scenario The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages link refers to the page where voice messages used in the uploaded custom scenario should be managed Main Systens Users Telephony ketene Uplink Meteor Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages This page provides the possibility of uploading voice messages to be Attendant 00 played in the custom Auto Attendant scenario It also removes and downloads the uploaded files to a PC The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page contains a table where uploaded custom voice mess
246. on the number of active PPP connections IP Address lists the IP addresses corresponding to each network interface Subnet Mask lists the subnet masks corresponding to each network interface Properties will list either the MAC address corresponding to General Information Network Status Lines Status Memory Status Hardware Status SIP Registration Status License Status Interfaces Interface name IP address Subnet Mask Properties Monitor LAN 172 30 0 1 255 255 0 0 MAC 00 F5 A0 01 09 00 Watch LAN wan 19216873119 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 F5 A0 01 09 01 Watch WAN Default Gateway 192 168 73 5 DNS Server 192 168 73 10 Alternative DNS Server 192 168 0 2 each network interface on the Quadro or the PPTP L2TP and IPSec peer IP address if an active VPN IPSec or PPP SODA interface exists Monitor includes links to survey LAN WAN IPSec and PPP traffic correspondingly The VPN traffic link will be displayed only if a VPN has been configured The selection of these links ma lib will open a new window with a table of network traffic statistics DHCP oe pean on the following selected interfaces ons Running Firewall Disabled NAT Running PPP Stopped View VPN Status Service Name Status NTP Server Running NTP Client Running e Received Bytes e Transmitted Bytes e Received Packets e Transmitted Packets e Received Errors e Transmitted Errors Transfer Statistics e Rece
247. onding ISDN trunk will lead to the ISDN wizard where trunk s ISDN signaling settings can be configured The ISDN Wizard consists of several pages The ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings allows you to choose the interface type and the connection type of the selected trunk s The Interface Type drop down list allows you to select between the User and the Network interfaces If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the CO then User interface type should be selected If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the PBX then Network interface type should be selected in that case Quadro acts as a CO for that PBX Mam System Users The Connection Type manipulation radio button group allows ISDN Wizard you to choose the connection type for the selected trunk s e PTP Point to Point In case of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if only Quadro is connected to the ISDN trunk from CO no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from CO besides the Quadro In case of connection to the PBX Network interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if only the PBX is connected to the ISDN trunk from the Quadro no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from the Quadro In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to manually mode assigning the default value of 0 If needed jf osha eee that value can be changed later in the Advanc
248. onding extension s Codecs The link leads to the e Extension Codecs page Clicking on each user extension in the Extensions table will open the extension specific Extension Settings menu The Pickup Group Call Park and Paging Group extensions are displayed without a link in the Extensions Management table and extension pages Additionally the supplementary services configuration pages will not be accessible for this type of extensions Add opens the Add Entry page where the type and number Main System Users Telephony torio Uplink Matwork of the new extension should be defined This page consists of the following components Extensions Management Add Entry The Extension text field is used to enter a new extension number If non digit symbols have been entered the error Incorrect Extension no symbol characters allowed will appear If an extension with the same number already exists in the Extensions Management table the error Extension already exists will appear Please Note Extension number cannot start with the digits 0 You can add extensions of up to 20 digits long However the Call Routing won t be adjusted automatically you may need to manually adjust the routing rules for extensions in custom length The Type drop down list is used to select the type of the extension User Extension Pickup Group Call Park Paging Group or Attendant to be created for details see below Fig 11 68 Extensions Management Add En
249. one ISDN trunks present on the Quadro These checkboxes are used to select the ISDN trunk number s over which the ISDN traffic chart will be built ISDN Channel Usage Statistics At least one Trunk checkbox should be selected Trunk 1 otherwise error message appears ee The Time Range of Statistic Table drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be Y Trunk 3 collected and the corresponding diagram chart that is to be built M Trunk 4 A group of checkboxes allows to specify information to Nmetangporetkusiotanie Uned M be displayed multiple checkboxes may be selected at the time Incoming Calls e Incoming Calls number of incoming ISDN calls J outgoing Calls e Outgoing Calls number of outgoing ISDN calls o Maximum Active Calls number of maximum active ISDN calls Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved At least one of these checkboxes should be selected Fig 11 19 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics page otherwise error message appears The button Show generates a ISDN Channel Usage Statistics diagram over the selected criteria The letters M and K used in the legend of the displayed diagrams a show the total number of specified criteria K means ISDN Channel Usage Statistics thousands and M millions sment Srl Time Tue May 15 11 24 52 2007 ill CDVEl Main System Users Telephony hisi ret ink Heiek er Oo Dev 1 Statistics Din faethe es Las With rela
250. or TLS For TLS you may activate Line 6 16 Inactive UserName locext16 Model 9133i 00 08 5D 18 15 CB Advanced W the TLS certificate update mechanism from IP Phone to obtain the latest certificate generated by the Quadro Inactive UserName locext17 Model 57i 00 08 5D 19 5C 7B Advanced Y Inactive UserName locext18 Model Polycom SoundPoint IP 650 11 11 11 11 11 11 For automatic SIP phone configuration the SIP phone should be reset rebooted The appropriate configuration will then be automatically downloaded from Quadro to the SIP Phone Inactive UserName locext19 Model 480i 00 00 00 00 00 00 Advanced Inactive Please Note For automatic configuration some SIP phones may require additional actions to follow the restart For example by default the IP Dialog SIP Tone Il is in a non auto provisioning mode so it should be manually enabled on the phone Refer to the user s manual Fig Il 118 IP Line Settings page of the corresponding SIP phone for instructions on performing a factory reset or reboot on any of the supported phones what additional configurations are required for a specific SIP phone and how to manipulate with the GUI Men Sen here IP Line Settings IFP Line 1 By pressing the Web link in the Details column for each configured SIP phone will lead you to the Web configuration page of the corresponding SIP phone Please Note This link only works from the LAN side of the Quadro i e
251. or message prevents entering the wrong password The New Password text field requires a new password for the Administrator Reentering the new password in the Confirm New Password text field will confirm the new password The password can consist of numeric values only Up to twenty 0 20 digits are allowed A corresponding warning appears if any other symbols are inserted The Enable User and Disabled User functional buttons are used to enable or disable the Local Administrator s account Attention It is highly recommended to define a proper and non empty password on this page if the extension is being used for the Call Relay service from the Quadro s Auto Attendant Quadro4Li SW Version RBA Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note The Administrators account cannot be disabled Main Sytem Usere Telepheey emormetiifink eto epygi User Rights Management The Roles page contains a table where the Local Administrator and Extensions users are listed This page allows you to set the permissions to the GUI pages for each user in the table The Edit functional button leads to the Change Access Rights page where a list of user specific GUI pages is displayed Select the user in the table and press Edit to manage the permission for the corresponding user Fig Il 62 Roles page at User Rights Management SE Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep 81 quadro User Rights
252. osing aleji malls and Gusto voice messages Losing call slaisice Losing pending avents Losing he transtor siaisics Cumrera language pace Language pack Ale bo uplosd VdaliFladimags Relaas Duid angP ack Sh Dres Ramga wani lino p ATTENTION A er pressing Save youll have lo reboot he device manually even if you dor ingle he language pack l Save J Back Fig 11 59 Upload Language Pack page The Remove Current Language Pack link is only seen when a custom language pack is uploaded and is also used to remove it from the system Pressing Save will start uploading the custom language pack to the board Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 33 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Attention Pressing the Save button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your device manually even if you have cancelled the language pack update procedure on the following steps The next page displayed will show verification of the language pack being uploaded and asks for confirmation to overwrite the existing custom language pack if applicable After final confirmation the system will upload the selected custom Language Pack and it will reboot User Rights Management The User Rights Management service sets restrictions on the GUI access for various users permits or denies the access to certain Web GUI configuration pages and creates multilevel user management of the
253. otal number of matching digits inside and outside the braces brackets in the descending order Criterion 2 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Criterion 2 The list of patterns Matching digits 123 1 3 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 L A N The list of patterns Matching digits d 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 100 150 asd 1 ea ir 1 3 12 31 123 3 hal ii ha RE 1 3 Step 3 The new sub lists are arranged separately from each other by the number of matching digits outside the braces brackets Criterion 3 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 82 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Criterion 3 The list of patterns Matching digits 1231 4 1 1 3 3 0 8 2 100 150 asd 1 1 FE o ECC o o m ee ES The list of patterns Matching digits 2 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 4 100 150 asd 1 123 221 1 3 a 3 7 ee 3 pets 11 15 3 ETA 1 1 T 2 EA ee OS 1 3 0 The Best Matching Algorithm will stop after executing step 3 as no new sub lists are formed The resultant list of prioritized patterns will be the following The prioritized list 1231 1 1 3 3 0 8 100 150 asd 1 123 2221 1 3 1231 123 11 15 3 an 4 1 3 VolP Carrier Wizard
254. ough FAX disabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled Display name Attendant FAX forwarding disabled Show on Public Directory enabled Percentage of System Memory 5 Scenario default Send AA digits to Routing Table disabled Attendant 00 Settings Attendant Redirection on Timeout disabled Scenario Welcome Message enabled Welcome Message Recurring Attendant Prompt and Attendant Ringing Announcement default Attendant 00 Settings SIP and SIP Samsara es R Advanced Codecs G711u preferred G711a G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 G729a enabled iLBC disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled Attendant 00 Settings Codecs T 38 FAX disabled Pass Through FAX disabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled Default Percentage of System Memory 1 Attendant 00 Settings General Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 116 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Call Statistics Enabled 100 entries for all type of calls Automatic Downloading of Call Statistics disabled UDP and TCP Port 5060 Session Timer disabled SIP Settings TLS Port empty DNS Server for SIP default SIP timers RFC 3261 Properties for all Codecs except iLBC Packetization 20ms Silence Suppression yes iLBC properties RTP Set
255. p Group The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the available call types PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls from global telephone network Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be parsed through the Call Routing Table Man Siem Wears Telephony her ivet pane Hola oa Access List of Extenslon 67 Add Gil Delete Select al lippepse Selection Aci Fig 11 78 Access List of Extension page for Pickup Group Man System Users Taleplony Hier tie Uplink Hato Access List Add Entry SIF s meo a prgicorm SIP Clipboard Allow Fig Il 79 Access List of Extension Add Entry page for Pickup group The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the pickup service for the e
256. pace for voice messages on Quadro 2 Attendant Scenario This group is used to select between default and custom attendant functionality scenarios When the Default scenario is selected a group of settings should be adjusted Here the user defined Auto Attendant system messages can be uploaded and the list of Friendly Phones can be configured For Custom scenario a scenario script file in EpygiXML coding the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support should be defined and the custom voice messages can be uploaded The Default manipulation radio button selection enables the following components e The Send AA Digits to Routing Table checkbox selection switches the Auto Attendant to the routing mode Any inserted digits on the Auto Attendant prompt will be parsed Main Syam Usera Telephony rre Uplink Mor epysi through the Routing Table on the Quadro e Redirection on Timeout this group allows automatic call Extensions Management Edit Entry redirection in case no action has been performed by the caller The group offers the following options Attendant Scenario 00 Enable Redirection on Timeout checkbox is used to enable disable the automatic call redirection Recurring Attendant Prompt Repetition Count text field indicates the number of Recurring Attendant Prompts to be consecutively played to the caller with no action from MITE his her side When the Recurring Attendant Prompt is played the number of times i
257. pendent on whether it is a PBX number a SIP address or a PSTN number will be reached through the Call Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address where the call will be redirected The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here For the Auto call type a routing pattern needs to be defined Upload new call queue welcome message allows updating the active Call Queue welcome message played when a caller joins the extension s call queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 40 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Download call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Upload new call queue message allows updating the active call queue message played when a caller is being held in the queue download
258. pinging the specified ping target Traceroute Target is used to enter the IP address or host name of the destination to be trace routed The Traceroute button is used to process the router triggering to check the Internet connection In the field below these the output of the Ping or Traceroute procedure is shown To Check the Internet connection 1 Specify the destination address for the ICMP request in the Ping Target text field 2 Press the Ping button to process the ICMP request 3 Specify the destination address to trace the route 4 Press the Traceroute button to process the router triggering SNMP Settings The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices and is used by network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth On Quadro SNMP agent is running to allow administrators to remotely manage Quadro s network and the device s configuration Remote administration is being performed by means of special SNMP monitoring programs SNMP Manager which can automatically feedback by the certainly configured actions on some events on the Quadro or remotely modify Quadro s settings SNMP Settings page is divided into two pages Global SNMP Settings and SNMP Trap Settings Global SNMP Settings are used to enable the SNMP agent on the Quadro to select the SNMP pro
259. provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested only for certain SIP servers For others the field should be left empty Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP registration server accessibility to the verification mechanism Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts of SIP registration server accessibility verification If a reply is not received from the primary SIP server within this timeout the secondary SIP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will continue to be sent to the server A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively require the host address IP address or the host name the port number of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 3 contains the following VoIP Carrier access code selection components The Access Code text field requires a digit combination by dialing which the corresponding VoIP Carrier will be reached The Route Incoming Calls To drop down list allows you to select an extension or Auto Attendant on the Quadro where incoming calls from the configured VoIP Carrier should be routed to For the selected extension there will be an unconditional forwarding set up which will care for incoming calls forwarding from the VoIP carrier to the correspon
260. r e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet e Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet through Quadro provider s NAT e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet through peer provider s Fig 11 162 IPSec Connection Wizard Add IPSec Connection NAT The second page of the IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties serves to specify the members of the IPSec Connection and to set the basic parameters for encryption Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 93 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus A group of radio buttons are used with Dynamic IP Road Warrior and Static IP Remote Gateway to select if the remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device is connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and is acting as a Road Warrior or is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address and is acting as a VPN Gateway lf Dynamic IP RoadWarrior is selected the Remote Gateway IP Address text field will automatically generate the value any to allow access independent from the sending IP address Selecting Static IP Remote Gateway requires entering the IP address or the hostname of the remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device in the Remote Gateway text field A A at Please Note The Static IP Remote Gateway selection
261. re a new NTP server can be defined This page offers the NTP Server radio buttons that are used to choose between a manual and a predefined NTP server Manual requires the NTP servers FQDN Full Qualified Domain Name or its IP address Predefined is used to select the NTP servers host address from the drop down list where the most common NTP servers are listed The Move Up and Move Down functional buttons are used to sort NTP servers in the order they need to be accessed If the NTP server in the first position of the SNTP Servers table does not answer NTP server in the next position will try to be reached Please Note You can add another NTP server to the list if the defined NTP servers are not functional for example Quadro s date time is not being updated automatically Polling Interval indicates the time interval for the periodical synchronization between the timeserver and Quadro It counts in hours C epysi Man System Users Telephony leben mil Uplink Helwork Time Date Settings Fig 11 41 Time and Date Settings page Ban Sten Users Telephomy hibea met Uplink Helwork Add SNTP Server Er E iij an a o Save Back Fig 11 42 Add NTP Server page Attention Time and Date Settings will be reset if Quadro has lost power 26 Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mail Settings The System Mail Settings page allows you to send
262. re universal default voice messages for all extensions are defined To Configure an Extension 1 Press the Add button on the Extensions Management page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window 2 Enter the desired extension number in the Extension text field and select the extension type from the Type drop down list 3 Press Save to create an extension with the defined number 4 Select the checkbox of the newly created extension in the Extensions Management table and press the Edit button The Edit Entry page will appear in the browser window Move through the extension s configuration pages and fill the fields with the appropriate information To apply extension settings press Save Fig 11 88 Extensions Management Edit Entry page for multiple edit operation D Y To Delete an Extension 1 To remove an extension with all its settings select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding extensions that should be deleted from the Extensions Management table Press Select all if all extensions should be deleted 2 Click on the Delete button on the Extensions Management page 3 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes The extension s will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the extension in the list click No Extension Codecs To establish IP voice communication both partners have to use the same codec When establishing the communication line this codec is negotiated If the caller does not find an app
263. re update if the image does not correspond to the hardware version The Current Software Version field shows the old software version The New Software Version field shows the new version of the software image This page needs to be confirmed in order to continue image updating If you are sure that the image version is appropriate for your device press Save Fig 11 47 Firmware Check page Firmware update If you have confirmed the firmware version a new page with firmware update progress will be displayed next There are no functions available on this page just information about the firmware update procedure At some point the connection with the device is being lost and you need to wait until the firmware will be burned on the Quadro You will not be automatically redirected to the Login page To access the Quadro s Web GUI you need to connect Quadro again and login Attention After the firmware update all IP phones Fig 11 48 Fi Updat attached to the Quadro should be restarted a a a Networking Tools The Networking Tools page provides the possibility to check the Internet connection Ping sends four ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol A GES Sak TN TGS requests with a default size of 64 bytes to the destination IP address or host name specified in the text field Ping Target Networking Tools The response times are logged and the round trip time the time required from being sent until being received agai
264. red e RSA requires the public RSA key of your IPSec Connection partner Please Note System prevents to start a connection with Shared Secret automatic keying selected if there is already a connection with RSA automatic keying started and vice versa The Local ID requires an IP address Quadro FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way Remote ID also requires an IP address the IPSec Connection partner s FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way Mam Syaiem Users Telephony henna Uplink Hetero IPSec Connection Wizard The Local ID and Remote ID text fields may have the values in one of the formats presented below IP address example 10 1 19 32 Host name example vpn epygi com This form requires additional resources to resolve the host name a amola FSA public i therefore it is not recommended to use this format V1OSuKEesOvigieys7IH kiaqike A Automatic keying toQuadro99 FQDN example vpn epygi com This form is y considered as a string and is not being resolved It is recommended to use this form for most applications ee user FQDN example quadro vpn epygi com This form is also considered as a string and is not being resolved It has no advantages over the previous form Please Note The Local ID and Remote ID values are mandatory for RSA sel
265. reject the specific call it can be a popup window or any other type of dialog box depending on the call controlling application If the request is accepted the call will be placed Otherwise if the request is rejected the call will be skipped In case of no feedback from the call controlling application the call will be accepted after a timeout defined in the configuration of the call controlling application Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 76 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Failover Reason s radio buttons indicate whether the system should use the next matching pattern if call setup with the current routing rule fails and allows choosing the reasons to be considered as a failover e None indicates that matching patterns should not be used regardless of the failover reason e Failover Reason s indicates possible failure reasons Failure reasons vary depending on the call type selected on the previous page If the call cannot be established due to selected Failure Reasons the call routing table will be parsed for the next matching pattern and if found the call will be routed to the specified destination o Cannot Establish Connection failure reason is available for ISDN calls and indicates cases when connection cannot be established e Busy available for PBX SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when the dialed destination is busy e Wrong Number available for PBX SIP S
266. ription of the routing pattern The Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller ID checkbox selection allows limiting the functionality of the current route to be used by the defined caller s only If this checkbox is enabled inbound caller information Inbound Caller Pattern Inbound Call Type Inbound Port ID etc will be required later in the Call Routing Wizard The Set Date Time Period s checkbox selection allows you to define a validity period s for current routing patterns to take place and to define pattern date time rules When this checkbox is enabled the Call Routing Wizard Page 5 will be displayed Require Authorization for Enabling Disabling checkbox is used to enable administrator s password authentication when enabler disabler keys are configured for the routing rule The service can be used locally from the handset see Feature Codes in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide or remotely from Auto Attendant see Auto Attendant Services in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide When this checkbox is selected administrator s password will be requested to enable disable the certain routing rule s If the administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even to those which have no authorization enabled Enabler Key and Disabler Key text fields request digit combination which should be dialed from the handset or Auto Attendant to enable or disable the c
267. rivate network VPN over the Internet Remote users can access their corporate networks via any ISP that supports PP TP on its servers PPTP encapsulates any type of network protocol IP IPX etc and transports it over IP Therefore if IP is the original protocol IP packets ride as encrypted messages inside PPTP packets running over IP PPTP is based on point to point protocol PPP and the Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE protocol Encryption is performed by Microsoft s Point to Point Encryption MPPE which is based on RC4 L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol is a protocol from the IETF which allows a PPP session to run over the Internet an ATM or frame relay network L2TP does not include encryption as does PPTP but defaults to using IPSec in order to provide virtual private network VPN connections from remote users to the corporate LAN Derived from Microsoft s Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP and Cisco s Layer 2 Forwarding L2F technology L2TP encapsulates PPP frames into IP packets either at the remote user s PC or at an ISP that has an L2TP remote access concentrator LAC The LAC transmits the L2TP packets over the network to the L2TP network server LNS at the corporate side Large carriers also may use L2TP to offer remote POPs to smaller ISPs Users at the remote locations dial into the modem pool of an L2TP access concentrator which forwards the L2TP traffic over the Internet or private network to the L2TP servers at the I
268. rks in the Quadro s LAN or to integrate the Quadro into the corporate network s virtual LAN WAN DHCP service can be activated both on virtual LAN or WAN interfaces VLAN is useful in corporate companies to divide large networks into groups and to have devices like Quadros and IP phones in each network separated for example to separate networks for data and voice transmission Priorities may be assigned to the interfaces for packets prioritization With VLAN configuration each virtual network will be characterized with a VLAN ID tag Packets addressed to that network will be checked towards the ID and if the ID number defined in the incoming packets matched the corresponding network s ID the packets will be accepted Otherwise if the ID does not match the packets will be dropped In the same way if the Quadro is integrated into the network that uses VLAN technology outgoing packets should have the ID number of the corresponding virtual network for the remote party to accept the packets from the Quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network lora quadro The DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface page contains a table with all enabled VLAN interfaces created DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface in VLAN Settings page see below and the corresponding parameters VLAN ID IP Address Range and WINS silat Server This page contains the following components Activate Edi Enable DHCP Server checkbox activates the DHCP Mani adress
269. rn The Display Name text field allows you to replace an original caller s ID with the custom display name for the corresponding routing rule This field is optional and when it is left empty an original caller ID will be displayed on the called destination s phone otherwise the name inserted here will appear on the phone This field is not available for PBX Voicemail call type routing rules e The Remove Display Name checkbox is used to remove caller IDs from calls made with this routing rule This field is not available for PBX Voicemail call type routing rules The Next button will open the Call Routing Wizard Page 4 where different information about Inbound Caller will be required depending on the selected Inbound Call Type For the SIP Inbound Call Type the Inbound Host text field will require one or more IP addresses or host names of the SIP server where the caller is registered or the caller s device if they are direct calls separated by a space In case of ISDN Inbound Call Types selected Inbound Port ID drop down list will require to select the Trunk number and on the next step a list of timeslot s used to receive calls from the defined caller The Call Routing Wizard Page 5 appears if the Set Date Time Period s checkbox previously had been enabled on Page 1 of the Local Call Routing Wizard It will require information about the pattern validity period s This page provides selection between Typical and Custom date time
270. ropriate codec the communication cannot take place If you want to be reachable by all IP calls it is helpful to support as many codecs as possible In this case all the codecs that Quadro offers should be added to the Codecs table Some codecs require a high transfer rate of up to 64 kbit s If you are certain you do not want to use these codecs make sure they are not listed in the table Codecs Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network cpygi The Extension Codecs page displays a list of Codecs with the state quadro of the Out of Band DTMF and FAX Support features for Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant Extension 11 Codecs Please Note Use caution when configuring Auto Attendant Codecs as Enable Disable Select all Inverse Selection Move up Move down Make preferred they are used by virtual extensions for redirecting the incoming calls aa e The table Codecs lists active voice codecs for the selected line that G 711u PCM audio coding standard 8 KHz sample rate 8 bits 64 kbit s data rate preferred Enabled are supported by Quadro The order of records in the Active Codecs 6 711a PCM audio coding standard 8 kHz sample rate 8 bits 64 kbit s data rate Enabled table is important for transmitting and receiving A codec placed at the a do ba rae top of the table will be used as the preferred codec If the remote party does not support the preferred codec the following codecs will be tried e e ei eee in a top to down order in
271. rule definitions Main System User Telephony inben need Uplink Henwork The Typical selection contains the following group of radio buttons Call Routing Wizard that are used to select the frequency of the corresponding routing pattern that is to take place Date Time Rules Add Entry e Daily e Weekly the preferred weekday s should be selected for this option e Monthly the calendar day should be selected for this option e Annually the calendar day and month should be selected for this option In the Available Time Period drop down lists the time range of the pattern validation should be defined Any time selected in this field will be considered corresponding to the Quadro s Time Date Settings The Custom selection provides the option to manually define the validity period s Use the following format to insert pattern a date time rule s Fig 11 139 Call Routing Wizard page 5 Month Month Month Day Day Day hh mm hh mm Please Note Established patterns based on the Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings in the System Configuration Wizard will be marked in bold and will be placed in the first position in the Call Routing Table Additionally they cannot be modified and deleted from the Call Routing Table The Duplicate functional button is used to create a routing pattern with the settings of an exiting one This is to avoid configuring a new routing entry completely by duplicating an exis
272. s used to define a SIP server and SIP registration parameters The following parameters are required for this selection Username the registration username on the SIP server Password the registration password on the SIP server Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepysi SIP Server the IP address or the host name of the SIP Q4Lit09 server Key System Emulation SLA1 SIP Port the port of the SIP server SLA Name ISDN1 Authentication User Name an identification parameter to EY O reach the SIP server It should be provided by the SIP ta service provider and can be requested for some SIP servers only For others the field should be left empty Custom Settings User Name Outbound Proxy Host Address and Port the IP address or the host name and the port number of the outbound pacawurd proxy SIP server For more details see Extensions SIP Server Management ee e Use SLA Settings choose this selection to use the SIP settings of another SLA line This selection is also used to allow multiple line appearances on the same ITSP provider Use RTP Proxy Authentication User Name The SLA drop down list is used to select the SLA line See whose SIP settings will be used for the corresponding SLA Host address line Port The DID text field requires an optional identification number ee used by some ITSP providers to differentiate between the vscstasetings sta E call appearances on the selected li
273. s e CallBlk blocks the last caller oe For Snom phones when multiple IP lines are selected on the Attached IP Lines text field on the first page of the x Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard this list ore additionally contains the number of specified IP lines That l nPar Ea selection is used to set the correspondence between the selected IP lines and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so select the IP lines corresponding to each programmable key from the Functions drop down list on this page Each programmable key on the Snom IP phone will now be responsible for the selected IP line on the Quadro Mom System Users Tebephony broker reel Uplink He barr For Aastra phones except the 9133i model a Hard Key Line 4 L4 drop down is available to use the default Hard Key Line 4 of the IP phone for the SLA lines You may select the SLA line to which the Hard Key Line 4 of your Aastra phone will be Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard assigned The Hard Key Line 4 assigned to an SLA line will ne work exactly the same way like the programmable key does ETENEE OCO Phone Model Som 100 Please Note Once a new receptionist is created the Call MAC Addara did Queue feature will be automatically enabled with the attached iP Lines 123 Magp d IF Lin s To Kays 213 corresponding Call Queue Size and Max Call Queue Appearance settings on all extensions attached to the IP lines defined in the Attached I
274. s o Firewall NAT o Filtering Rules o IDS Log e Network e Install Checklist e Feature Codes e Help e Logout Home Logout Fig 11 157 Internet Uplink menu in Plain theme The PPP PPTP Settings page is used to establish a connection over the DSL link or any other type of uplink to the ISP A connection is needed to set up and make or receive calls through PPP over Ethernet The connection may be configured for manual setup or always up Once a connection has been established between the Quadro and the provider Quadro users will be able to make and receive calls at any time The PPP PPTP Settings page offers the following components The Advanced PPP Settings link refers to the same named page where certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment can be adjusted This link is not available when accessing this page through the Internet Configuration Wizard The PPTP Server text fields are only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and require the IP address of the PPTP server The Encryption drop down list is only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and it is used to select the encryption for the traffic over the PPTP interface Authentication Settings require the Username and Password used for the authentication on the ISP server Dial Behavior radio buttons enables the selections Dial Manually if this radio button is activated a button will be displayed in the
275. s Telephony Internet Uplink Network e e p Yy g l 4 quadro System Configuration Wizard Getting Started This wizard guides you through System Configuration DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Regional Settings and Preferences Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Code Settings DHCP Settings for the LAN are described in the chapters below The LAN configuration and regional settings will be described later in this chapter Please Note It is strongly recommended to leave the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to the administrator Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 3 System Configuration Wizard Start page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 7 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide The System Configuration page contains the host name IP address and Subnet Mask information about the Quadro LAN interface These settings make Quadro available to the internal network The System Configuration page offers the following input options Host Name requires a host name for the Quadro device Domain Name requires the LAN side domain name which the Quadro belongs to IP Address requires the Quadro host address for the LAN interface Subnet Mask requires the Quadro hosts Subnet Mask The Regional Settings and Preferences are used to select settings specific to the location of the Quadro This is important for the functionality of the v
276. s Telephony her met Uplink Met woth Firewall and NAT page This page offers the following components Advanced Firewall Configuration The Ping Stealth checkbox selection prohibits a Ping operation toward Quadro from its WAN The Fool Portscanner checkbox selection prohibits Quadro portscanning from its WAN As a reply to a Portscanning operation network unreachable or host unreachable feedback messages will be sent Fig 11 175 Advanced Firewall Settings page Filtering Rules The Filtering Rules page allows you to configure the filters for incoming and outgoing traffic To prevent inaccurate configuration only one rule per service is allowed The user may use IP groups to include several IP addresses for this rule Since the filtering rules specify the operation mode of the firewall they only take effect if the firewall has been enabled additionally NAT should be enabled to use the Port Forwarding function in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering rules The filtering rules are independent from the security level so they will work if enabled no matter what security level has been selected Please Note Applying firewall rules will prevent the establishment of new connections that violate the rules Applying rules does not kill existing connections that violate the rule View All displays all configured filters specified by their State enabled or disabled the selected Service the set Action allowed or blocked
277. s a block cipher algorithm with 64 bit blocks and a 56 bit key This algorithm is considered to be unsecure for sensitive information 3DES Triple DES uses three DES encryptions on a single data block with three different keys to achieve a higher security than is available from a single DES pass AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a computer security standard which became effective on May 26 2002 by NIST to replace DES The cryptography scheme is a symmetric block cipher which encrypts and decrypts 128 bit blocks of data Lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits are standard key lengths used by AES The area Authentication offers the following parameters to be selected SHA Secure Hash Algorithm is a strong digest algorithm proposed by the US NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology agency as a standard digest algorithm and is used in the Digital Signature standard FIPS number 186 from NIST SHA is an improved variant of MD4 producing a 160 bit hash SHA and MD5 are the message digest algorithms available in IPSEC SHAT is an enhanced version of SHA It works with checksums like MD5 does but it makes a longer hash MD5 Message Digest is a hash algorithm that makes a checksum over the messages The checksum is sent with the data and enables the receiver to notice whether the data has been altered The Diffie Hellman parameter is used to determine the length of the base prime numbers used during the key exchange process The crypt
278. s a list of all extensions and their parameters Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 36 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The following columns are present in the table e Extension lists user or attendant extensions on the Quadro This number is used for internal PBX calls e Display Name indicates an optional Cepysi display name to identity the Caller Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network JO quadro e Attached Line indicates the IP line corresponding extension is attached to Extensions Management R is displayed in this column when SIP Remote Extension see below functionality is enabled on the extension e SIP Address displays the SIP address of the corresponding extension The column displays the full SIP address i e 12 IP Line 2 77833612 0sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec PCMU username sipserver port when the 13 IP Line 3 77833613 sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec PCMU Registration on SIP Server checkbox is selected If registration is disabled the SIP address will be displayed in the following format username Proxy 16 IP Line 6 7783361 6 sip epygi com 5060 5 34 min 53 sec POMU sipserver port If no SIP registration server or SIP server port is defined Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Reset SIP Settings Extension Display Name Attached Line SIP Address Percentage of System Memory Call Relay Codecs A Attendant
279. s applies moderate password enforcement for the SIP Registration password when configuring an i phone The Security Diagnostics tool will warn about critical and medium secur issues Hugh This applies very strict password criaria Tor the SIP Registration password when configuring an IP phone The Secunty Diagnostics tool will indicate even Me smallest potential secunty issues Enable SIP 105 Epygi treats system security with the utmost priomy and has taken an active approach to provide users with information and tools to ald in maintaining system security itis highty recommended that users of an IF based system need to be familiar wath industry best practices to maintain system securte Limitation of Liability end Remedies in no event shall Epygi Technologies be liable for any conseguentia incidental direct indirect special punitive of oiher dernages including without lirnitalion loss of data loss of phone calls loss of business orofits business imerrupton loss of business information or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use or inability to use the Quadro Saw pase check your pending events 1 Waming For SIP IOS to take effect the firewall should be enabled Copyright Cy 20032010 Eprui Teshnvlogios Lid Al rights ewserred Fig 11 11 Quadro System Security Management page The System Security Settings page includes the following components The Security Level table allows selecting the Security Level defining requir
280. scending order by clicking on the header of the respective column There is a checkbox for every IPSec connection to select it for further editing Start activates the connection establishment of the selected IPSec connection The State of the IPSec connection will change into Connected or Activated depending on the IPSec connection type If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected appears Man System Usas Telephony iiet reed ipiri Heimo k IPSec Connection Settings Attention It is not recommended to simultaneously start a Stat Stop Add Edit Delete Select al kueren Selection static and a dynamic connection configured to use the same Cuneection Hanja Ramone setas secret key A dynamic connection may capture the static rr connection peer and vice versa depending on which connection established first Stop disconnects the selected IPSec connection The state of the IPSec connection will change into Stopped If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected will appear More than one record may be selected at a time to be stopped Fig 11 161 IPSec Connection Settings page Add leads to the Add IPSec Connection wizard where a new IPSec connection can be defined and specified The wizard provides several pages Edit leads to a set of IPSec Connection Properties pages to modify the parameters of the selected IPSec connection The page includes the same
281. scription link of the corresponding entry in the IDS Entries table The IDS Logs detailed page has a following preview The Issue Detailed Log table is a detailed list of new and read IDS entries The table contains a Status row that has the value New if the entry is still unread or that is empty if the entry has already been read Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Man Sam ses Tole mian Uplink Mebaork IDS Logs Fig 11 184 IDS Log page Man System Uses Telephenny inaner Uplink Herak IDS Logs WEB CGl test cgi access Fig 11 185 IDS issue detailed preview 104 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Network Menu Mebwork Me Siles ba Tri Ii Mee GuadrodLi Management Achre Calla Fig 11 186 Network menu in Dynamo theme Fig 11 187 Network menu in Plain theme DNS Settings The DNS Settings page provides the option of setting up a name server for the Quadro It offers the following components Main System Uses Telephony kernet Uplink Cepysi The Nameserver Assignment radio buttons are as follows DNS Settings e The Dynamically by provider selection automatically configures the assignment of the name server address from the provider party e Fixed Nameserver address is a manually selected name server The Nameserver text field requires the IP address of an external name server The Alternative Nameserver text field requires the IP address of the secondary name l BNE vata
282. se Other selection if your SIP phone is not in this lis t Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network e Line Appearance text field requires a number of Line Settings simultaneous calls supported by the SIP phone IP Line Settings e Username and Password are required for this selection l Enable PnP for IP lines They should match on both the Quadro and the SIP phone for Y Enable firmware version control a successful connection The Password field is checked Y Connect IP phones from WAN side against its strength and you may see how strong is your Hide disabled IP lines inserted password right below that field To achieve the well Available IP Lines Attached Extension Type Details protected strong password minimum 8 characters of letters in Line 11 Inactive UserName locext11 Model 55i 00 08 5D 19 76 C3 Advanced Web upper and lower case symbols and numbers should be used l If you are unable to define a strong password press Choose gt Line 2 12 Inactive UserName locext12 Model 9133i 00 08 5D 18 15 96 Advanced Web Generated Password to use one of system defined strong Line 3 3 Inactive UserName locext13 Model 480i 00 08 5D 03 DB BC Advanced Web passwords gt Line 1 Inactive UserName locext14 Model 480i 00 08 5D 03 06 7C Advanced Web e Transport drop down list is used to select the SIP protocol Line 5 15 Inactive UserName locext15 Model 480i 00 08 5D 03 DB 12 Advanced Web transport layer UDP TCP
283. sed to configure the automatic downloading of the call statistics Two options of downloading the call statistics are available uploading the call statistics file to the server or sending it to the mailing address This page consists of the following components The Enable Automatically Download Call Statistics checkbox enables automatic downloading mechanism of the call statistics Please Note This service only refers to the statistics collected from the moment of enabling this service and forward any previously generated statistics will not be downloaded The Number of Call Records to Download drop down list is used to select the portion size of the call statistics including all types of call statistic i e successful missed and unsuccessful outgoing call statistics in the timing order which will be downloaded to the server or send per email The number selected in this drop down list indicates the number of entries in the single downloaded call statistics file If there are no enough entries in the call statistics table on the Quadro the system will wait until the necessary number of entries will be collected and then will upload the statistics file to the server or send it to the email address Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 57 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The File Format drop down list is used to select the format in which call statistics will be saved This list offers to choose between Tab Delim
284. ses the current selection if no records are selected clicking on inverse selection will check all records To create a new Call Routing rule Click on the Call Routing Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Call Routing page Specify the Pattern in the corresponding field Select the Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix if required Select the Call Type from the drop down list Define the Metric or leave the default Enter a Description if needed Enable the Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller ID checkbox if the route functionality should be limited This is dependent on the inbound caller information 9 Enable the Set Date Time Period s checkbox if a route should be functional within certain time date intervals 10 Press Next 11 Select the user or attendant extension from the Use Extension Settings drop down list that the call will be placed on 12 Specify the Destination Host and Port Number Username and Password if an IP or IP PSTN call type has been selected For the IP PSTN call type enable Multiple Logons if necessary Enable the Use RTP Proxy checkbox if needed 13 Choose the Authentication and Accounting method from the AAA Required drop down list 14 Choose a Fail Reason from the corresponding drop down list 15 Configure Transport Protocol for SIP messages and SIP Privacy parameters as needed 16 Press the Next button 17 If the Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller I
285. sion i e Call Park Ext watch the calls parked to the AARD corresponding extensions and a possibility to CallBack retrieve the calls parked to that extension A This list also contains a number of PBX services available on a the Quadro and accessible with the key combination see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this page the key combinations become transparent for the IP phones too Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call CallBack calls back to the last caller Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro CallBlk blocks the last caller Key Fuctiomality 4 Hana Han Hana EN be eR a oa al Administrator s Menus Fig 11 120 Programmable Keys Configuration page the preview is individual for different IP phone model For Aastra phones except the 91331 model a Hard Key Line 4 L4 drop down is available to use the default Hard Key Line 4 of the IP phone for the SLA lines You may select the SLA line to which the Hard Key Line 4 of your Aastra phone will be assigned The Hard Key Line 4 assigned to an SLA line will work exactly the same way like the programmab
286. sponding call forwarding service on the current SLA line Main System Users Telephony Internal Uplink Mietwrork Attention The following rules are applicable to all call forwarding types e PSTN destinations with PSTN or Auto call type TAKE SAA have priority in Forward to list If there are different su ancwer cas conwerame EMADIOM SaDio Add EGE Delano SolectaN Karke Selection Advanced Settings for SLA1 Jo Answer Cal Forzada A L destinations in the Forward to list the call will be State Eocvrard to forwarded to PSTN destination in the same time any O Enabled S1P 11294Go eorgilos available SIP or PBX destinations will receive a short O Enabled PEK 19 ring If the PSTN destination was not successful the E Enabled PSTH 51151971 next PSTN destination will be dialed otherwise if there are no more PSTN destinations in the table the call will be forwarded to any available SIP and PBX destinations simultaneously a C Par Hae o If there are multiple entries with any combination of PBX or SIP call types then all destinations will ring simultaneously and the call will be established with Fig Il 151 Advanced Settings for SLA page the destination that will pick up the call the first o Unconditional call forwarding service has higher priority versus to other forwarding types e when Unconditional Call Forwarding is enabled No Answer Forwarding services will not work even if they are enabled The
287. sta onhook 036 FSO 1 Betting Ting detecbos patema count t 039 Add 17 CIO FSE Detect 030 GRR Rear 17 CID DTF Detect net tained 15 54 Dy 388 14d 1 CO erate Pero Giri Ped FER Aminani pe 181 Dato 0150554 Gala 368 Add 2 CIO penerati n Type On hook FSE inet hoe 15 Cie 077160994 ee 05 54 04 316 Pati 1 CiD FSA Danari s 317 Remi 7 Gi Fk Chemin Dark Copengha ot AMT Erro Tarda Lid All gdh eer Fig Il 56 System Logs View System Logs page 32 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Features Administrator s Menus This page lists all features that may be activated by a software key characterized by a Feature Description and provided with its Status e No Key Found the feature is currently not available e Reboot Needed the feature key has been entered and Quadro needs to be rebooted e Activated the feature is now available on the Quadro e Free trail the feature is activated for evaluation The evaluation period is 30 day Following features may be activated via the software key e Debug enables Telnet connection towards the Quadro for debugging purposes e 3pcc Support enables Third Party Call Control feature on the Quadro The feature allows the call controlling applications running on a user PC to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro e IP Phone support enables additional LAN sided IP phones support
288. stination during that period the pattern will be stopped and next routing rule might be optionally loo 20032008 Ena tecnologies Ltd A mont reserved considered depending on the Fail Reason configuration on the corresponding pattern Fig 11 137 Call Routing Wizard page 2 The Multiple Logons ML checkbox is only available for the IP PSTN call type and allows denies multiple logon to the public SIP server with the same username at the same time The Allowed Call Count text field that allows you to limit the number of multiple logons to the public SIP server The field requires information in a range from 2 to 20 If you leave this field empty no limitation will apply to the number of simultaneous logons The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is available for SIP and IP PSTN call types and is applicable when a route is used for calls through Quadro between peers that are both located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected RTP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers The AAA Required checkboxes are used to choose one or more of the following Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA settings e Local Authentication with this checkbox selected callers will need to pass authentication through the Local AAA table see below when dialing the current pattern e RADIUS Authentication and Authorization this checkbox is prese
289. t Osip epygi com This is a number you can give others in order for them to reach you The SIP number to reach the Auto Attendant of your local Quadro is lt SIP number gt sip epygi com Your SIP group link which provides you a phone directory of numbers to call is http www e i com si ro view php viewarp lt qgroupname gt The email address of your SIP System Administrator is lt email address gt The phone number of your SIP System Administrator is lt phone numbers gt Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x AA Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Welcome Page Appendix System Default Values Administrator Settings l Login name admin Admin Settings Password 19 Quadro Domain Name epygi config loc 172 30 0 1 ABE Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Disabled AE AON No special devices defined Locale US TimeZone Central Time US amp Canada Theme Dynamo Theme on Login disabled Emergency code 911 Emergency and PSTN codes PSTN code 9 Upstream 10000 WAN Interface Bandwidth Downstream 10000 Min Data Rate 0 WAN IP Automatically through DHCP Assigned by device wae nedlee MTU 1500 Bytes DNS Server Dynamically Security Level Medium Sy ae RUN MANAGEMEN Enable SIP IDS 1 disabled IP Routing Configuration Automatically Backup Configuration disabled Automatic Firmware Update enabled Server Configuration Assign manually Server Name ftp epygi com Serv
290. t the prefix code for accessing the PSTN line in the routing mode Dialing the digits inserted in this text field will provide the PSTN dial tone when dialed from the handset Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus cpygi quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network System Configuration Wizard System Configuration QuadrodLi Host Name Domain Name epygi config loc LAN IP Configuration IP Clipboard IP Clipboard 027 Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved IP Address 30 SubnetMask 255 255 Fig Il 4 System Configuration Wizard System Configuration page Ccpygi quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network System Configuration Wizard Regional Settings and Preferences Your locale location US vi Timezone GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada Choose Default GUI Theme CI Choose Theme on Login 5 0 Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 5 System Configuration Wizard Regional Settings page Ccpysi quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Code Settings Please enter all your Emergency Codes separated by commas and PSTN Access Code into following fields Emergency Codes 914 PSTN Ac
291. t incoming call will again go to the call queue Main Syalem Users Tetephony Infernal Uplink Robo k Extensions Management Edit Entry Remote Settings Coll Gui Satin pica Wena fi Licensing Sap To User Soblinas Go To Lime setings Stes Espai Te kaa LH 202008 Epa ito LES ay S Pris A Call Queue Settings 11 Enant Gill Gu u Siti Maz Call Queve Appearance A nats Redirection Call Queue Message Repetition Count 5 Call Type SIP tal 1910158506001 Com l SIP Clipboard dings Upload Agw call Queue weltom menage CWrediigutitwit a Ese E a ii Deve Upload naw call ques message Sra Bak All ngh nel Fig Il 73 Extensions Management Edit Entry Call Queue Settings page Enable Redirection checkbox is used to enable the call redirection to the other destination after some time spent in the queue This will avoid the caller to wait in the queue for too long This checkbox selection enables the following components Call Queue Message Repetition Count text field requires the number of call queue messages played during the caller is in the queue after which the call in the queue will be automatically redirected to the destination defined below Call Type lists the available call types e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions e SIP calls through a SIP server e PSTN calls to a global telephone network e Auto used for undefined call types The destination inde
292. t is a PSTN call PBX call or IP call Call Start Time shows the call start date and time Call Duration shows the current call duration RX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the incoming packets TX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the outgoing packets If RX and TX codecs are the same only one Codec field will be displayed The list of supplementary services provides the following additional status information for each telephone line Enabled or Disabled For Incoming and Outgoing Call Blocking Speed Calling Hiding Caller Info Voice Mailbox and Group List services the number of Entries will be displayed in the corresponding service table For Voice Mail Service the voice mailbox configuration mode is displayed here This allows administrator to view the status and to be notified about services running on Quadro for every line The services are designed as links that guide the administrator to the corresponding service page of the selected user The Line Status for ISDN Trunk displays the state of the B1 and B2 channels and the information about the active calls on them Page includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters appear only whenever an event takes place on the channel Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 15 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Static Parameters as Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep 81 B chan
293. th a unique IP address It displays a read only table describing all the leased IP hosts and their parameters The table contains the following columns IP address host IP address assigned by Quadro MAC address host MAC address provided by the host itself a a a ea ee Eii Lease Start date and time when the leased IP address has DHCP Leases been activated Lease End date and time when the leased IP address has been or will be deactivated Binding State indicates the state of the DHCP lease Fig Il 193 DHCP Leases page for LAN interface Hostname hostname provided by the host itself DHCP Advanced Settings N 7 i Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cep 81 quadro The DHCP Advanced Settings page is used to modify the advanced options of the DHCP server on the Quadro This DHCP Advanced Settings page contains a table where a list of default DHCP server PE EE gg IN options is already defined More options can be added from Add Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection this page as well as settings of the existing options can be Option Name Option Value modified All options in the table on this page are then sent to E calas 172 30 0 1 the DHCP clients E Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 The Authoritative checkbox is used to enable disable E Domain name servers 1723004 authoritative mode on the Quadro DHCP server E nername semers sf Cd Disabling the checkbox is recommend
294. the MSNs provided by the CO If this checkbox is enabled but no value is defined in the Default outgoing Caller ID empty caller information will be sent to the CO If this checkbox is disabled the source caller information Fig 11 124 ISDN Wizard Routing Settings will be forwarded to the CO Select the Advanced Settings checkbox if you wish to adjust trunk L2 and L3 Settings manually otherwise leave this checkbox unselected to use the system default values If the trunk is configured in the Network mode the next page of the wizard will be the ISDN Wizard ISDN Low Level Settings page otherwise if the trunk is configured in the User mode this page will be skipped and the next page will be the ISDN Wizard L2 amp L3 Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 68 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Main Sec Users belephony fae eed Up Pelym E ISDN Wizard ISDN Low Level Settings The ISDN Wizard ISDN Low Level Settings page offers a Power Source selection option When this option is selected the QuadrolSDN device will act as a power supply for the ISDN phones connected to it Otherwise when this checkbox is not selected ISDN phones should have their own power supplies Please Note This checkbox should be always disabled when Fig Il 125 ISDN Wizard ISDN Low Level Settings the ISDN gateway has a PBX or Telecom connected The ISDN Wizard L2 amp L3 Settings is used for advan
295. the NAT Exclusion Table Press Select all if all IP ranges should to be deleted 2 Press the Delete button on the NAT Exclusion Table page 3 Confirm the deletion by pressing Yes The IP range will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the IP range in the list press No Line Settings The Line Settings are used to configure Quadro IP Line if available on the board settings The Line Settings page consists of IP Line Settings page for IP Lines configuration IP Line Settings The IP Line Settings page is used to configure IP lines for IP phones to be connected to the Quadro Quadro provides the options to connect SIP phones to its LAN side assign the corresponding IP line to an active extension and use SIP phones as a simple phone with all telephony services of the Quadro for example call hold waiting transfer etc There are 10 IP lines available on Quadro4Li The IP Lines Settings page displays a table with the available IP lines on the Quadro Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox is used to setup the SIP phones connected to the Quadro via Plug and Play automatic configuration service To use this service this checkbox needs to be selected The SIP phone should be reset then After a clean boot up of the SIP phone Quadro will detect the SIP phone and all its characteristics generate the automatic configuration file and will upload it to the SIP phone The SIP phone will be then configured on the first available IP line of the Q
296. the Protocol drop down list Enter the port range in the Port Range text fields or leave one of them empty to define a particular port for the service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link The Service Pool Configuration page appears with the table of services if any 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding services that should be deleted from the Service Pool table Press Select all if all services should be deleted 3 Click on the Delete button on the Service Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel by clicking on No Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 102 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide IP Pool Administrator s Menus The Manage IP Pool Groups link opens the IP Pool Configuration page The IP Pool table is the list of all added groups and the members assigned to these groups If a group is empty EMPTY will be indicated in the Members column If hidden the group members will still remain active but HIDDEN will be displayed in the Members column The IP Pool Configuration is used to add groups of IP addresses that have the same restriction criteria When adding a new filtering rule groups may be used instead of several IP addresses IP Pool Configuration offers the following components View makes hidden groups visible Hide makes group members hidden and adds the HIDDEN comment in the member column Add opens the Add Group page where a new group may be
297. timer in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 120000 It is responsible for the outgoing call steadiness when CALL PROCEEDING is already received from the destination but Alert Guard Trneoul 50 0 500 meee Called Party Mumberina Plan 5UMfeleahcrynumbenng alan Calla Party Murnbarino Plan SGM telephony numbering plan iniri Progress Tort lo PETHEBX Mone call confirmation ALERT CONNECT DISC or E enabie TE Remove Procedure NS ne PROGRESS has not yet arrived Dl remanent Ter vane ee Ton to IF e Alert Guard Timeout requires the value for the Alert i atarate Disconnacton Moda Guard Timer in milliseconds numeric values from 0 to 500 C ovem s CLAD win P Ascead iden between CALL PROC and ALERT messages Alert Guard REN Timer it is used when Quadro is connected to a slow ISDN A PBX Recommended values are fast connection Oms normal 150ms default Slow ISDN PBX 350ms Fig 11 126 ISDN Wizard L2 amp L3 Settings very slow ISDN PBX 500ms The Coding Type drop down list allows you to select between a law and mu law coding types z z Cancel Copyright C SG O Epi Teoh eae 5d AN righit etaria bree The Switch Type is another configuration parameter that depends on the Service Provider The Passive Mode checkbox is used to leave the ISDN Layer1 connection in the Slave mode When this checkbox is selected Layer1 remains idle when calls are not avai
298. ting entry with different settings To use the Duplicate button only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row should be selected will appear The Duplicate button opens the Call Routing Wizard where all fields except the Pattern field are already filled in A Pattern for the new route will be required anyway The Move Up Move Down buttons are used to move call routing patterns one level up or down within the Call Routing table The sequence of the routing patterns is important when making routing calls because the Call Routing table is parsed from the top down and routing will take place according to the first pattern that matches the dialed number The Move To button is used to move the selected entry to a different position in the Call Routing Table This will increase or decrease the selected pattern s priority Pressing the button will open the page where a row number should be specified together with the position the selected entry is to be placed before or after the defined row The Local AAA Table page allows you to manage local authentication and the authorization database Callers dialing the routes which have an AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting option enabled will pass the authorization on the Local AAA Table by using a phone number or username password depending on the corresponding entry configuration on this page Call Routing Local AAA Table The caller passes authorization automaticall
299. tings Tunnels to Slave Devices Add Entry SP_Tunnel_Quadro90 Jygi Fig 11 131 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Add Entry page Main System Users Tekpho imernet Uplink Hebork epygi SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices o faecal fesse Selection BF nie Mee Luar Mame Fig 11 132 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices page 72 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Tunnels to Master Devices page consists of a table where master devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new master device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The Enable Registration checkbox selection is used to enable the registration to the corresponding master device Mam System Users Telephony Beret Ud Metwork The Tunnel Name text field requires the SIP tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel name with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quadro Z Gnabie Registranon however this is not mandatory am SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel
300. tings Packetization 30ms Silence Suppression yes G 726 Standard ITU T specification RTP RTCP port range 6000 6099 RTCP Support disabled NAT Traversal for SIP Automatic SIP and RTP Parameters Use STUN SIP TCP Port 5060 STUN Parameters Primary STUN Server stun epygi com Primary STUN Port 3478 Secondary STUN Server undefined Secondary STUN Port undefined Polling Interval 1 hour Keep alive interval 120 seconds NAT IP checking interval 300 seconds No entries in NAT Exclusion table IP Lines Configuration PnP for IP lines enabled l Firmware version control enabled Line Settings Connect IP phones from WAN side enabled 1 18 IP Lines attached to 11 28 extensions IP Lines 1 10 enabled others enabled for a trial period All IP lines are in inactive mode ISDN Trunks Trunk 1 Trunk 2 Trunk 3 and Trunk 4 exist Settings for all Trunks State started Interface Type User Connection Type PTMP Point To Multi Point RO Seung Service Type No MSN Route Incoming Call to 00 Use Default outgoing Caller ID enabled Default outgoing MSN undefined Advanced Settings disabled ISDN Trunks Transmit Gain 0 Receive Gain 0 Voice Mail Recording Gain 0 Playback Gain 0 Enable Trunks to Slave Devices disabled Trunks to Slave Devices no entries Enable Trunks to Master Devices disabled Trunks to Master Devices no entries Route all inc
301. tion The Lines Status table displayed for IP lines includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters only appear when an event takes place on the extension Static Parameters Cepysi 04Li109 Refresh in 295 seconds Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Extension shows the extension number of the selected telephone line Quadro Status Lines Status Display Name shows the corresponding name General Information IPLine1 IPLine2 P Line3 IP Line 4 IP Line 5 IP Line 6 IPLine IP Line8 Phone State may have the value On Hook or Off Hook For IP Line Status this field may additionally Lines Status IP Line 17 IPLine18 ISDN Trunki ISDN Trunk2 ISDN Trunk3 ISDN Trunk 4 have Not Configured and Temporary Offline values Number of Active Calls shows the number of calls that are currently present on the phone Dynamic Parameters Registration Username shows the IP phone s client name registered on the Quadro Last Registered shows the date and time the corresponding IP phone has been last registered on the Quadro Expires In shows when the last registration of the IP phone will expire Binding IP Address shows the IP address of the IP phone within the Quadro s LAN network Memory Status Hardware Status License Status Extension Display Name Phone state Number of active calls Registration State Username
302. tionally requires the port number that will stand instead of the original port number when incoming packet is being forwarded If this field is left empty the original port number will be used when forwarding the packet M m Sebo Uses Deep Mit rt Llibre Heteatk Restriction radio buttons Add Filtering Rules Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding e Selecting Any blocks or allows all host IP addresses This selection is not present for the Management Access Blocked and Allowed IP List rules e Selecting Single IP will require the IP address of the allowed or blocked host Filter e Selecting IP Mask will require the subnet to be allowed or blocked specified by an IP address and the Maskbits The following are Maskbit examples 255 0 0 0 8 255 255 0 0 16 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 255 32 e Single URL requires the hostname of the allowed or blocked host e Group indicates the user defined groups that include IP addresses that should to be allowed or blocked The Description field is used to insert an optional description of Fig 11 177 Filtering Rules Page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic the filtering rule Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 101 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide To Add a Filtering Rule Administrator s Menus 1 Select the Filter link Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Outgoing Traffic Management Access SIP Access Blocked IP List Allowed IP List or Restricting IPSec to
303. tiple numbers from the CO and two simultaneous calls can take place at a time The ISDN Trunk Settings page is used to configure the ISDN trunk and their signaling There are 4 ISDN trunks available on the Quadro4Li gateway The Trunk Settings table lists the available ISDN trunks on the Quadro and their settings trunk name and interface types Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi 04Li109 ISDN Trunk Settings The Start and Stop functional links are used to start shutdown the selected ISDN trunk s When an ISDN trunk is in a Start Stop Restart Copyto Trunk s Restore Default Settings Select all Inverse Selection Trunks Interface Type Connection Type Stats shutdown state ISDN calls cannot be placed or received The Restart functional link is used to bring channel s to the El aeaa user PTHP Point seso Loman initial idle state on both sides When applying one of these user PTMP Point To mutti Poin ISDN Stats options any active traffic on the channel s will be terminated Neha PTMP Point To Multi Poin ISDN Stats The Copy to Trunk s functional link displays a page used to ISDN Stats choose a trunk to which selected trunk s settings should be copied to Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies The Restore Default Settings functional link restores the i l Fig 11 121 ISDN Setti default signaling settings of the selected ISDN trunk s ig ettings page Clicking on the corresp
304. tly in the browser The Restart generation button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to cancel the generated configuration file and to start over Bem System Usas Pelephony Weber net Uplink Melek C epysi Configuration Summary Po Slings nly a L Etar genoraing a legible combgurabi n Me J Fig 11 35 Configuration Summary Parameters page Bam System Users Telcpliojm ntema Lipi Meteo Cepygi Configuration Summary Ly Diwn cad generated confguratori View ganeralad comiguration restar generation Haip Fig 11 36 Configuration Summary Preview page The Upload Legible Configuration page is used to upload a configuration file in a text format The Browse button in the opened page is used to browse certain legible configuration file to be uploaded and updated into the system The configuration files to be uploaded should be in the txt format otherwise a system error occurs Configuration file upload progress will be displayed in the area below Events The Events page has two tables All system events that have occurred will be displayed in one table and event settings will be displayed in the other The System Events page may be accessed through the Events link from the main menu It lists information about system events that have occurred on Quadro When a new event takes place a record is added to the System Event table For failure events priority
305. to des py Fig Il 20 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics chart Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 16 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Memory Status Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi The Memory Status page includes tables with the aaLi109 available User Space information for each extension ds These tables display the space used by the voice Quadro Status Memory Status mailbox and uploaded recorded system greetings It shows the free and total space counted in General Information A A minutes seconds for every extension This page eee pensera xenon Space for Extension Voice Mailbox System Messages Free Space Total Space includes the following information Eines status System memory lo sec lo sec 6 min 52 sec 6 min 52 sec Memory Status Memory Size shows total memory space counted in PARA E seo asec 34 bly Sheet E dll minutes seconds available on the Quadro and SIP Registration Status 1 0 se 0 sec 34min 20500 34min20se assigned to all extensions one E 12 8 sec 1 sec 34 min 11 sec 34 min 20 sec DE icense Status E O sec 0 sec 34 min 20 sec 34 min 20 sec The table s links lead the administrator to the License talus ECON a CECI Ce ETC extension settings page where User Space may be CBE IM ECN EXT altered sec sec min sec min sec Osec i ee 0 sec Toer imee irr mazge sec The System Memory row indicates the space 29 a ac min 52 sec
306. to select the security of the SIP route by means of hiding or replacing depending on the configuration of the SIP server the key headers of the SIP messages used to establish the call e Default Privacy with this selection Quadro specific SIP privacy will not be applied and all privacy will rely on the configuration of the SIP Server e Disable Privacy with this selection SIP call security will not be disabled and all headers of the SIP message will be transparently visible to the destination e Enable Privacy with this selection SIP privacy will be specified for the corresponding route This selection enables a group of checkboxes in order to choose the key headers that are to be fully or partly hidden or replaced The Require Privacy checkbox selection is used to restrict the delivery of the SIP message if any of the selected headers cannot be hidden or replaced depending on the configuration of the SIP server before being sent to the destination The Port ID drop down list is present for ISDN call types and contains ISDN trunks Any Port selection allows to route calls via the first available ISDN trunk lian em items Tip Baad beet pii Mtm t Call Routing Wizard The Call Routing Wizard Page 3 appears if the Fill Call Source Information checkbox had been enabled on Page 1 jound Call Type gt A Entry of the Call Routing Wizard It will require information about ee the inbound caller ee tee The Inbound Caller Pattern f
307. tocol version for communication with the administrating application and to define the community for administrating application to connect the Quadro Enable SNMP checkbox is used to enable SNMP agent on the Quadro System Location text field requires optional information to describe the network where SNMP management is performed System Contact text field requires optional information about the contact person responsible for the SNMP management in the defined network Field may indicate the point person s name A E o a aaa Cepy g email address phone number or other contact information quadro Enable SNMP v1 2c checkbox is used to enable SNMP v1 2c protocol version for the messaging between Quadro s SNMP Global SNMP Settings agent and the administrating application If this checkbox is not f f i Global SNMP Settings SNMP Trap Settings cd SNMP v1 will be imelisd Global SNMP Settings SNMP Tra ttin SNMP v1 v2c Read Only Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read only management like gathering information events System Location Quadro Network statistics etc about Quadro s Field may contain some kind of password which should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management Y Enable SNMP v1 2c System Contact admin sip epygi com Enable SNMP v1 2c Read Write Access checkbox SNMP v1 v2c Read Only Community pub
308. tra 9143i 33i also supports FVC Aastra 9480i 35i also supports FVC Aastra 9480iCT Linksys SPA921 Linksys SPA922 Linksys SPA941 Linksys SPA942 Programmable Keys Configuration The Programmable Keys Configuration page is used to assign a function to the programmable keys of the IP phone The design of this page depends on the IP phone model Independently on the IP phone model this page contains a number of the programmable keys and Functionality drop down list assigned to each of them The following options are available in the Functionality drop Aastra 67311 also supports FVC Polycom SoundPoint IP 300SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 330SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 331SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 335SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 450SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 501SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 550SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 601SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 650SIP Polycom SoundStation IP 6000 Yealink T26 Grandstream BT200 Grandstream GXP2000 Main Sysiem Users Talephony internet Uplink bsetawceric Programmable Keys Configuration Top Keys Key Fuctionality 1 a down list e SLA use the functionality of the SLA line as an ene configured in the Key System Emulation page It SLA 1 may be a direct connection to the available PSTN 2 SLA 2 lines on the Quadro or to the certain SIP server e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro 5 SLAS and a possibility to pickup the call addressed to that i SLA 6 exten
309. try page Reset SIP Settings functional button is used to reset all SIP settings of the selected extension s to the default values including all settings listed under SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages see below Edit opens the Edit Entry page where a newly created user or attendant extension settings might be adjusted To operate with Edit one or more record s have to be selected otherwise the No records selected error message will appear The Edit Entry page consists of two frames In the left frame settings groups are listed Clicking on the corresponding settings group displays their configuration options in the right frame Please Note Save changes before moving among settings groups Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 37 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus User Extension Settings 1 General Settings Mais Sytem Lima Taepa bisualak aiik This group requires extension s personal information and has Extensions Management Edit Entry the following components P Gendral Semrga 11 Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered the Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making
310. ts activated If this checkbox is not enabled the voice mailbox will get activated immediately the call arrives The ring tones will be played during the timeout specified in the Ringing Simulation Timeout text field 2 SIP Settings This group is used to configure extension s SIP registration settings and consists of the following components User Name requires a user name for the extension registration sii ae O on the SIP server The registration user name needs to be unique on the SIP server and it is displayed on the called phone Extensions Management Edit Entry when performing an IP call SIP Registration Settings 11 Password indicates the password for the extension registration on a SIP server Registration Password is used to confirm the password If the entered password does not correspond to the one entered in the Password field the error message The passwords do not match Please try again will appear Ge To User Serrinas SIP Server indicates the host address of the SIP server The field is not limited regarding symbol usage or length It can be either an IP address such as 192 168 0 26 or a host address such as Sip epygi com o To Line Settings Fig 11 70 Extensions Management Edit Entry SIP Settings page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 38 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus SIP Port indicates the host port number to connect to the SIP server The SIP s
311. turn the Licensed Materials to the Licensor at its request 4 No Unauthorized Copying or Modification The Licensed Materials are copyrighted and contain proprietary information and trade secrets of the Licensor Unauthorized copying modification or reproduction of the Licensed Materials is expressly forbidden Further you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or electronically transfer the Licensed Materials or translate the Licensed Materials into another language under penalty of law 5 Transfer You may sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials to another party that also acquires your Quadro IPPBX product If you sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials you must at the same time transfer the documentation to the acquirer Also you cannot sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials to another party unless that party also agrees to the terms and conditions of this Agreement Except as expressly permitted by this section you may not transfer the Licensed Materials to a third party 6 Protection And Security Except as permitted under Section 5 of this Agreement you agree not to deliver or otherwise make available the Licensed Materials or any part thereof to any person other than the Licensor or its employees without the prior written consent of the Licensor You agree to use your best efforts and take all reasonable steps to safeguard the Licensed Materials to ensure that no unauthorized person shall have acc
312. ty to have different voice mail settings activated depending on which extension is called Please Note If an extension does not have a profile specified in a call routing rule or the specified profile name is incorrect the default Voice Mail Settings of the extension will be used i pa p a gt Main W c Mail our Extensi n Supplementary Services Cx p Y J l Guedes a Voice Mail Profiles Extension 11 Add Edi Dobe Pron Haro Ol VEN Tor Home L VIE for fey O VIAS for Lirgent Calls Bade The Voice Mail Profiles page contains a table where all Voice Mail Profiles for the corresponding extension are ee listed The the following functional buttons are available Fig 11 202 Voice Mail Profiles page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 110 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Add opens the Add Entry page where a new Profile Name should be defined Edit opens the Edit Entry page where Voice Mail Profile settings should be defined The Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page is used configure the profile specific voice mail settings This page contains the following components Maximum Mail Message Duration lists the possible values for maximum mail duration counted in minutes during which a voice mail will be recorded The Unlimited selection allows voice message to be recorded as long as the user s space could hold Send new voice message via email is an option to send new voice mail files via e mail to the defi
313. uadro Auto Attendant services without requiring authentication When adding a trusted phone to the list an existing extension has to be chosen The parameters extension number and password as well as SIP and Speed Calling Settings will be used automatically for the trusted caller access of the Quadro Auto Attendant A direct connection to the Call Relay menu can be optionally provided M n Seton User Tekij Be e Up Hiti h Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database page displays the Authorized Phones Database table where the trusted phones are listed Only SIP and PSTN users can be added to the Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database table displays all trusted callers with their settings For example the call type caller address extension they automatically login with information if they have automatic access to Call Relay Menu of the Auto Attendant etc Fig 11 100 Authorized Phones Database Each record in the table has an assigned checkbox The checkbox is used to edit or delete the corresponding record The No records selected error message occurs if the user activates the edit or delete button with no records being selected The error message One record should be selected appears if the user tries to edit more than one record The heading of each column in the table has a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending
314. uadro and will become completely functional Please Note The Plug and Play service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below This service will not work in case the SIP phone is already manually configured or if it is not reset after enabling the Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox Enable Firmware Version Control checkbox is used to control the firmware version running on the SIP Phone attached to the Quadro This service also allows you to have the new firmware automatically downloaded and installed on your SIP Phone in case your SIP phone was running an old firmware upon connecting to the Quadro or when the Quadro s firmware has been updated and the compatibility was changed to the higher firmware version of the SIP phone Every new firmware of Quadro is compatible to a certain firmware version of each supported SIP phone If you are running older firmware on your SIP phone this service will automatically download and install the newer firmware on your SIP phone Please Note The Firmware Version Control service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below Attention Do not select this checkbox if you wish to run other firmware version on your SIP phone than the one compatible with the Quadro The Connect IP phones from WAN side checkbox indicates whether the IP phones are connected to the Quadro via its WAN or LAN port Disable the checkbox if the phones are placed on the Quadro LAN otherwise leave it
315. uch as passwords The Quadro can be set up to act as a VPN router when connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address or as an IPSec connection Road Warrior when using dynamic IP addresses Establishing an IPSec connection normally requires the functionality of a VPN gateway on each side of the communication line An intelligent Internet access router for example Quadro delivers this function but also PCs or workstations may also be equipped with VPN gateway functionality Home offices typically prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses When Quadro is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address it will be set up to act as a VPN gateway Quadro is then prepared to establish an IPSec connection with another VPN gateway device but also allows access to Road Warriors A notebook laptop used by a traveling employee could also be a Road Warrior Access to their company s intranet via an IPSec connection can be obtained regardless of their location Quadro can also be set up to act as a Road Warrior If a home office is connected to the Internet via Quadro with PPPoE Point to Point Protocol and dynamic IP addressing setting up Quadro as a Road Warrior will allow an IPSec connection to the corporate network Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 92 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus For the encryption and decryption of the data transmitted via the IPSec connection a key is used RSA used by Quadro is an asymmetric
316. user dials the pickup extension when several extensions of the pickup group are ringing the first oldest in time call will be picked up When the user dials the pickup extension and no extensions of the pickup group are ringing the No call is available to pickup message will be played to the user When the user that is not listed in the Access List dials the pickup extension password authorization of the pickup extension will be required to answer the call When a denied user dials the pickup extension the Party does not accept your call message will be played to the user For Pickup Group extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for regular extensions see User Extension Settings described above The General Settings page has a different content as follows 1 General Settings for pickup group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Mam System Users Telephony kher Upit Netywoek Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings 12 Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits I
317. versal extension voice messages from the handset Receptionist Management The receptionist feature on the Quadro offers a variety of services to manipulate with multiple calls to keep the calls in the queue with the perspective to be answered by the receptionist and finally to be forwarded to the corresponding destination if needed The following services are available to the receptionist Call Queue Extension Status Call Interception Voicemail Transfer Multi Company Receptionist Call Queue This feature allows keeping multiple incoming calls in the queue when being on the line and to answer calls in the order they have been received The usage of this service is not limited to receptionist only and can also be used by the extension user if configured correspondingly The configuration of the Call Queue feature is done from the Extensions Management Edit Entry page where the length of the call queue and the call queue appearance is defined When the Call Queue service is enabled the second arriving call to the receptionist extension user will be either set into the queue if call queue appearance is 1 or will be ringing in the background of the active call if call waiting is enabled for the user and the call queue appearance value is greater than 1 If the call ringing in the background isn t answered it will be transferred to the user s voice mailbox or if no answer forwarding is enabled it will be forwarded to the correspondin
318. vice for the corresponding extension and defines the Quadro s internal storage as a location for the Voice Mails This selection also allows you to manipulate with the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard used by the extension s user to setup personal settings the password the voice mail greeting message and the user s name for Extensions Directory from the handset By default the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is enabled when the Quadro s is in the factory reset state It can be manually enabled from this page by pressing the Activate button When the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is activated the extension s user is prompted to insert personal settings as he she enters his her Voice Mailbox for the first time Unless the required information is not inserted the button is changed to Deactivate and the Configuration Wizard Status becomes Activated Use Deactivate button to stop Voice Mail Configuration Wizard When the user inserted the required information the Configuration Wizard Status on this page is changed to Passed and a Reactivate button appears Using Reactivate button you might re enable the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard so the user will be again prompted about his her personal settings next time entering his her Voice Mailbox Instructions on how to insert the information prompted in the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard are available in the Features Codes see Manual IIl Extension s Users Guide e Use External Voice Mail
319. warnings automatically about the board status or problems to the administrator System events that require email notification are selected on the Events page System mail must be enabled and the SMTP server needs to be configured for voice message transmission to the extension user s mailing account Enable enables system mail sending and voice messages transmission to the extension user s mailbox SMTP Host requires the SMTP host IP address or domain Main System Users Telephony Daa Moo name The SMTP host needs to be configured to enable voice message transmission System Mail Settings SMTP Port requires the SMTP host port number z Mail Sender Address text field requires the source address for the Quadro notification emails The email address defined here should be an existing valid e mail address registered on the selected SMTP server or it should have permission to use that particular SMTP server for e mail transmission Mail Recipient Address text field requires an active e mail address where system emails will be delivered The e mail recipient here can be a Quadro administrator or someone responsible for network and system problems Mail Recipient Address CC text field requires an active email address where a carbon copy CC of the system emails will be delivered Fig Il 43 System Mail Settings page Enable SMTP Authentication must be selected if the specified SMTP server requires authentication In this case authenticat
320. ximum packet size on the Ethernet in bytes MTU is used to fragment the packets before transmitting them to the network The MTU preferred value is dependent on the Ethernet connection The default MTU size is 1500 Bytes for Ethernet and 1400 Bytes for PPPoE Please consult with your ISP administrator to get the corresponding settings Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Man Seen Usas Telephony interned Uplink Hetwwork Internet Configuration Wizard WAN IF Configuration IE Capbeara 1P Cipboara Fig Il 9 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN IP Configuration page Main System Usera Talepheey imamet Uplink Network Internet Configuration Wizard WAN Interface Configuration Fig 11 10 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN MAC Address Configuration page 10 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus System Security Management The System Security Management offers a possibility of managing the global security levels running the system security diagnostics program and receiving complete reports on the Quadro configuration security It includes two pages the System Security Settings page and the System Security Diagnostics page Main System Users Conferences Telephony C epysi quadiom System Security Management This allows a user bo enter any SIP Registration password when configuring en IP phone The Security Olagnostics tool will warn for only Me most critical securty issues Madumi Thi
321. xtensions included in the Pickup Group Call Park Extension Settings For Call Park extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings while General Settings page has a different content 1 General Settings for call park extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Mam System Users Telephony knert Upted Metaror k Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed or a voice mail is sent Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings 31 Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Password Fig 11 80 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for call park extension page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 43 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus confirm
322. y entered IP address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address To text fields Press the Save button to make the policy route with these settings ae To Add a VPN Route Select the VPN Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the VPN Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the VPN connection from the Route Via drop down list Enter the destination IP address and the subnet mask into the Route To text fields Press the Save button to make the VPN route with these settings A Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 20 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Configuration Management The Configuration Management page assists the administrator with managing the system configuration settings and voice data For example the administrator is able to backup and download the settings to a PC and then upload and restore them back to the Quadro Additionally this page provides the possibility of restoring the factory default configuration settings Mai System Users Telephone hits net Uplink Met woth Configuration Management The Backup amp Automatically Download all config amp voice data link leads to the Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page where the automatic backup of the system configuration and the voice data can be configured The service allows you to setup Quadro so it will automatically backup the system configuration and t
323. y if the detected phone Add Es Della S lectal Wers Selection number of the caller dialing a route has the AAA option enabled is Van hee feminie Fever Dt and is registered in the Local AAA Table If the caller ID service is disabled or the caller s phone number is not registered the caller is asked to enter a registration user name and password Main Sate Users Teleph lr Lili Meiwork The Add functional button opens the Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry page where a new local AAA record can be created Fig 11 140 Local AAA Table page Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x 78 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry page offers a group of manipulation radio buttons to select the type of authorization and the following other parameters A COMS A A une e Authentication by Caller ID this selection is used to set Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry the authentication based on the caller s phone number which is considered to be automatically detected The Phone O authentcaton by Caller 1 Prana Numer Number SIP User Name text field requires the caller s phone E Americanos by hog number or the SIP username Only numeric and wildcard characters are allowed for this field T Y Y are used to define a range or a quantity of numbers For example Expiration Date and Time 2 13 17 ww a c means that the dialed number may be
324. y route Enable and Disable are used to activate or to deactivate the selected route s Raise Priority and Lower Priority are used to increase or decrease the priority of the selected policy route s by one At least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear Quadro4Li SW Version 5 2 x Man System Users Telephony baaret Upled Met wah IP Static Routes P Static Hostos IF PY Rout PETITE Route Enable Disabde Add dit Delete Select oll meres Selection Sta mal State Route to Vin iP Address disabled 156 52 71 0 24 1192108754 enabled u 0 33 24032 l 192168 152 disabled 192 100 7504 17230 5954 Back Fig Il 26 IP Static Routing table Man System Users Telephony kaammat Uple Nawoik Add IP Static Route Fig Il 27 Add IP Static Routing page Mian Syren les Telephony bieri Uini hewu k IP Policy Routes y Aa Moca Aoi PETITE Pues Crab Dienblo figs Priority Lower Prion Add Col Dale Soleciol inveren Solocisa Lange Sat Arita 4 1 Py ine ity Eolo Pony Ma e Azckh ess O enabied up 1027410 188077 ERL EEEE dizabled 155 51 71 004 109 1860 75 25 7 enabled ap 113 1111334004 103160750 Back Fig Il 28 IP Policy Routing table 19 Quadro4Li Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Telephony The Add IP Policy Route page offers the following input options
325. y when System Mail is enabled on the Quadro see Mail Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail delivery via email Send new voice message notification via SMS allows voice mail notification delivery via SMS to the defined mobile number Checkbox activates the following input options Mobile Number text field requires the destination s mobile number The next two fields are used for retransmission of SMS notifications The Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If notification is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field Please Note This service will work only when SMS Service is enabled on the Quadro see SMS Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail notifications delivery via SMS Send new voice message notification via phone call enables the voice mail notification delivery via phone call to the defined phone number The checkbox activates the following input options e Call Type drop down list includes the available call types PBX local calls to Quadro extensions SIP calls through a SIP server Auto for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number or SIP address will be reached through Routing
326. ymbols inside Each token indicates a value of the certain field on this page The value is dependent on the SMS gateway requirements For example user username amp password password amp to Vto V amp from V fromV amp text Vtext The tokens are the strings that have the following dependencies from the field in this page Yusername indicates the username defined in the field Username Ypassword indicates the password defined in the field Password to indicates the password defined in the field SMS Recipient Address from indicates the password defined in the field SMS Sender Address text indicates the SMS text generated by Quadro voice mail notification event notification etc Server text field requires the IP address or the host name of the SMS gateway Port text field requires the port number of the SMS gateway Use Secure HTTP checkbox enables access to SMS server via HTTPS Checkbox selection enables a Secure Port text field that requires the port number for HTTPS traffic Request Method manipulation radio buttons allow to select the HTTP request method used by Quadro the access the SMS gateway POST or GET Send Test SMS is used to send a test SMS to the defined SMS Recipient Address This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page Firmware Update This window allows updating the software of Quadro by installing new firmware image Users registered at Epygi will rec
327. ype manipulation radio buttons selection allows to choose whether the virtual interface will be LAN or WAN VLAN ID text field requires the virtual network ID Numeric value in a range from 0 to 4094 is allowed in this field Priority drop down list is used to select the priority of packets in the corresponding interface Packets with the lower priority 0 will be delivered first IP Address text field requires the IP address of the virtual interface Subnet Mask text field requires the subnet of the virtual interface Registration Form The Registration Form page appears when administrating an unregistered Quadro and it has been created for customer support purposes The page requires customer registration at the Epygi Technical Support Center It provides several links offering the following registration options Register now leads to the Epygi Technical Support System Registration page and requires customers information to submit the Quadro registration form Remind me later hides the registration notification in the Quadro through System Configuration Wizard or Internet Configuration Wizard until the next administrating activities Don t remind me more hides the registration notification forever Administrator s Additional Features Main System Users Telephony VLAN Settings Add Entry VJEnable Interface Type Vlan ID 1 0 4094 Priority 5 y IP Address Subnet Mask 255 1255 1255 0 Save Back

Quadro4Li Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents